9 The Lighting Handbook - Zumtobel !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

The Lighting
Handbook
Your concise
reference book –
always ready to hand.
Chapter 1
Lighting technology and lighting application
Chapter 2
Standard values for indoor and outdoor lighting
Based on the new European standards
Chapter 3
Products
Chapter 4
Lamps and ballasts
Chapter 5
Lighting and room management
Chapter 6
Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. required
Chapter 7
Technical information
Chapter 8
Checklists
Chapter 9
Services
Chapter 10
Notes
Imprint:
For questions and suggestions on the
“The Lighting Handbook”:
Zumtobel Lighting GmbH
Schweizer Strasse 30
Postfach 72
6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA
T +43/(0)5572/390-0
F +43/(0)5572/22 826
The Lighting Handbook
2nd edition, revised and updated, December 2008

Chapter 1
Lighting technology and lighting application
What is light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3
Basic parameters used in lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

Luminous flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Luminous intensity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Luminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Traditional quality characteristics of lighting . . . . . . . . 6–8
The right light – traditional and new quality criteria . 6
Illuminance – definition of terminology . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
Glare – glare limitation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Light colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Colour rendition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Measuring illuminance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lighting technology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 – 11
Types of lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 13
Lighting concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 15
Humanergy Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Comprehensive assessment of lighting quality (ELI) . . . 16 – 18
Visual performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Vista . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Visual comfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Vitality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Empowerment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI) . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
What is light?
Light is that part of the electromagnetic spectrum that is perceived
by our eyes.
What is light? What does the human eye see?
Wavelength [m] Relative spectral

brightness perception
Gamma rays
10-10 1.0
X-rays
Ultraviolet 0.8 Night Day
Visible light 0.6
-5
10 0.4
Infrared 0.2
Microwaves
100 350 450 550 650 750
Television, VSW Wavelength [nm]
Wavelength [m]
Medium wave
Radio waves
105
By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in

shades of grey.
Light has a triple effect:
– Light for visual functions

– llumination of task area in conformity with relevant
standards – glare-free and convenient
– Light creating biological effects

– Supporting people’s biological rhythms
– Stimulating and motivating
– Light for emotional perception

– Pleasant lighting enhancing the interior design
– Makes people relax and feel at ease
Chapter 1 / 3
Basic parameters used in lighting
Luminous flux – Luminous intensity – Illuminance – Luminance
Luminous flux q
q q
I= E=
Lumen [lm]
Luminous intensity I Illuminance E
Candela [lm/sr]=[cd] Lux [lm/m2]=[lx]

Luminance L
L= L=
[lm/(sr*m2)]=[cd/m2]
solid angle into which luminous flux is emitted

area hit by luminous flux
visible areas of light source
reflectance of area
3.14
for diffuse surface areas
Luminous flux
The luminous flux describes
the quantity of light emitted
by a light source.
The luminous efficiency
is the ratio of the luminous
flux to the electrical power
consumed (lm/W).
It is a measure of a lamp’s
Abbreviation: q Phi
economic efficiency. Unit: lm Lumen
4 / Chapter 1
Luminous intensity
The luminous intensity
describes the quantity of light
that is radiated in a particular
direction.
This is a useful measurement
for directive lighting elements
such as reflectors. It is repre-
sented by the luminous inten- Abbreviation: P
sity distribution curve (LDC). Unit: cd Candela
Illuminance
Illuminance describes the
quantity of luminous flux falling
on a surface. It decreases by
the square of the distance
(inverse square law). Relevant
standards specify the required
illuminance (e.g. EN 12464
“Lighting of indoor work- Abbreviation: E
places”). Unit: lx Lux
Illuminance:
E(lx) = luminous flux (lm)
area (m )
2
Luminance
Luminance is the only basic
lighting parameter that
is perceived by the eye.
It specifies the brightness of
a surface and is essentially
dependent on its reflectance
(finish and colour).
Abbreviation: L
Unit: cd/m2
Chapter 1 / 5
Traditional quality characteristics of lighting
The right light –
traditional and new quality criteria
T
R Good modelling
A Harmonious Glare
D brightness distribution limitation
I Correct light colour
T
I Sufficient Avoidance Appropriate
O illumination level of reflections colour rendition
N
A
L
Quality criteria
Changing Energy efficiency
N lighting situations
E Daylight integration
W
Personal Light as an interior
control design element
Illuminance – definition of terminology

Each term corresponds to the new European standards
(see Chapter 2 / 2).
Illuminance maintenance value E m: value that the illuminance
level must not fall below in the visual task area.
Visual task area: illuminance levels are specified for specific
visual tasks and are designed for the area in which these may
take place. If the precise location is not known, then the whole
room or a specific working area is used to define it. The visual
task area may be a horizontal, vertical or inclined plane.
Area immediately surrounding the visual task area: here
illuminance may be one level lower than in the visual task area
(e.g. 300 lx to 500 lx).
Maintenance factor: the initial value multiplied by the
maintenance factor gives the illuminance maintenance value.
The maintenance factor accounts for the reduction in luminous
flux from lamps, luminaires and room surfaces in the installation,
and can be determined on a case-by-case basis.
The maintenance schedule (the cleaning and maintenance
intervals for the lamps and installation) must be documented.

See also Chapter 8 / 22 on “Economic efficiency calculation”.
6 / Chapter 1
Relative illuminance (%)
initial
150 value
125
100 mainten-
ance
value
75
50
25
operating time
Maintenance value = maintenance factor x initial value
Glare – glare limitation

Direct glare Reflected glare
– luminaires without glare – reflective surfaces

cause
control – incorrect luminaire arrangement

– very bright surfaces – incorrect workstation position
– loss of concentration – loss of concentration

effect
– more frequent mistakes – more frequent mistakes

– fatigue – fatigue
– luminaires with limited – matching luminaire to

remedy
luminance levels workstation (layout)

– blinds – indirect lighting
– matt surfaces
Chapter 1 / 7
Light colour
The light colour describes the colour appearance of the light.
Colour temperature Appearance Association

ww up to 3,300 K reddish warm
nw 3,300 K – 5,300 K white intermediate
tw above 5,300 K blue-ish cool
Ww = warm white, nw = intermediate, tw = cool white
The light colour sets the underlying mood of the room!
Colour rendition
Colour rendition index Ra ≥ 90 80–89 70–79 60–69 40–59 20–39

Daylight
Incandescent lamp
Compact fluorescent lamp
Fluorescent lamp
Mercury vapour high-
pressure lamp
Metal halide lamp
Sodium vapour high-
pressure lamp
Application examples (minimum requirements for Ra):

Ra ≥ 90: colour inspection Ra 60–69: assembly work
Ra 80 – 89: offices Ra 40–59: fabrication shop
Ra 70 – 79: electronics industry Ra 20–39: warehouses
Display format on fluorescent lamps
Example 840: 8 40
Ra ≥ 80
Colour temperature 4,000 K (nw)

8 / Chapter 1
Measuring illuminance
Mean illuminance is the arithmetic mean of the point brilliance
levels measured with a luxmeter in a defined grid, under pre-
cisely specified conditions.
Measuring instruments: description and precision

– L: maximum precision, tolerance 3%
– A: high precision, tolerance 5%
– B: average precision; tolerance 10% (minimum requirement)
Measuring conditions
– avoid external light/daylight (measure separately and subtract)
– check mains voltage and ambient temperature
– use new, burnt-in lamps (discharge lamps 100 h)
Measuring grid and measuring level

– workplaces = 0.75 m; sports facilities (floor) = 0.03 m
– circulation areas, stairs, car parks (floor) = 0.03 m
– cylindrical illuminance = 1.2 m
– measuring grid: congruent triangles; approx. 1 m distance
– measuring grid not congruent with arrangement grid
Size of measuring field Grid element spacing

1m 0.2 m
5m 0.5 m
10 m 1.0 m
50 m 3.0 m
100 m 5.0 m
Chapter 1 / 9
Lighting technology
Under the new European standard for interior workplace lighting,
EN 12464, (psychological) glare is assessed by the unified glare
rating method (UGR), which is based on a formula for glare.
It takes account of all the luminaires in a system contributing to
the sensation of glare. UGR tables derived from this formula are
provided by the manufacturers for glare rating.
The Quickplan tables in Chapter 6 and the lighting catalogues
contain reference values for specific room sizes.
LP
(
UGR = 8 log 0.25
)
2
Lb 2
(1) (2)
The UGR method takes account of all the luminaires in the

system that contribute to the glare sensation (2) as well as the
brightness of walls and ceilings (1). It produces a UGR index.
The two methods – the one set out in DIN 5035 and the one
defined in EN 12464 – produce comparable results.
UGR limits (UGRL), that must not be exceeded:

≤ 16 Technical drawing
≤ 19 Reading, writing, training, meetings,
computer-based work
≤ 22 Craft and light industries

≤ 25 Heavy industry
≤ 28 Railway platforms, foyers
10 / Chapter 1
2000 1000 500 <300
28
2000 1000 500 <300

25
hs
a
22
for nominal illuminance (lx)
8
6
4
3
1
3 4
2000 1500 1000 750 500 <300
A
<300
2
19
Luminance L in cd/m2
3 4 5 6 8 104
1000 750 500
16
2
13
Quality class
8 103
A
1
2
3
UGRL
85°
75°
65°
55°
45°

= 45°
= 85°
The previously used luminance limiting curve method defined

in DIN 5035 assesses the mean luminance of the luminaires
across a beam angle of 45° to 85°. The new European standard
sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices,

which is equivalent to the luminance limiting curve for 500 lx
in Quality class 1.
Chapter 1 / 11
Types of lighting
Direct lighting:
– highly directional
– strong glare reduction at certain angles
– dark ceiling (cave effect)
– limited flexibility of workstation layout
– energy-efficient
Indirect lighting:
– diffuse lighting conditions
– room gains in height
– glare-free
– workstations can be positioned anywhere
– low energy efficiency
12 / Chapter 1
Indirect/direct lighting:
– pleasant room impression
– high user acceptance
– good contrast ratios
– flexible workstation layout
(indirect component > 60 %)
Mellow Light:
– indirect/direct solution for low ceiling heights
– workstations can be positioned anywhere
– glare-free
– reduced luminance levels at all viewing angles
– gives impression of daylight in room
Chapter 1 / 13
Lighting concepts
The definition of individual visual tasks for the purpose of
lighting design in a room, as provided for in the EN 12464
standard, opens up new perspectives for lighting design.
The quantity and quality of light can now be specified
exactly for any task area (see Chapter 2 / 2).
TASK AREA lighting concepts are a customised tool to fully

exploit the additional options provided. At the same time
they offer financial scope that can be used to improve
lighting comfort and enhance the room effect.
Visual function
TASK AREA lighting concepts provide the right quantity of light of
the best possible quality for every visual task. Uniformity, control
of glare and reflections, good contrast rendition and shadow
detail are consistently matched to the respective task. The light-
ing is not based on the room but perfectly adjusted to people’s
needs.
Emotional and biological effects

Focusing the lighting onto clearly defined areas means saving
investment and operating costs. The funds saved can be used to
improve comfort and enhance the room atmosphere, for instance
by exciting lighting accents, illuminated walls or dynamic lighting
scenarios.
Optimum energy efficiency

Large buildings provide huge potential for optimisation of energy
consumption. Lighting that is consistently focussed onto indi-
vidual task areas reduces mean illuminance levels and therefore
the average expenditure on energy. Savings can be further
increased by using daylight-based lighting management and
presence detectors.
14 / Chapter 1
Room-related lighting concepts take neither
individual task areas nor different visual tasks
into account. They are based on the most
demanding task performed in the room. The
position of the workstation is not defined, the
entire room disposes of a uniform lighting
quality.
Lighting focussed onto individual visual task

areas provides for varied light design in the
room. By illuminating walls, for instance,
rooms can be designed to be much more open
and attractive; dynamic lighting situations can

enhance their visual quality.
Chapter 1 / 15
Humanergy Balance
Human aspects + energy efficiency = Humanergy Balance
The Humanergy Balance concept harmonises both aspects of

lighting and makes it possible to assess them: ELI, the lighting
quality indicator, takes their physical and psychological effects
on people into account; LENI, the energy efficiency indicator,
assesses the economic and ecological aspects of light.
Comprehensive assessment of
lighting quality (ELI)
The Ergonomic Lighting Indicator (ELI) allows to assess lighting
quality in terms of quantity, using five descriptive quality criteria.
Checklists are used to record the individual criteria, which are
displayed in a Kiviat graph (spider chart). The outermost line in
the graph indicates optimum fulfilment of a criterion.
Visual performance
A
E B
Empowerment Vista
D C
Vitality Visual comfort
Example of ELI assessment using a spider chart.

16 / Chapter 1
Visual performance
Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for
ensuring that a visual task can be identified and the related
activities can be carried out. Consideration of the traditional
quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact on visual
task performance.
– Lighting level
– Uniformity of illuminance
– Colour rendition
– Avoiding hard shadows
– Contrast rendition
– Physiological glare
Vista
In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed
for seeing but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light
can provide guidance and make people accept the interior on
account of the first visual impression they get.
– Architectural design
– Mental design
– Guidance
– Hierarchy of perception
– External appearance
– Material
– Luminaires’ protection type
– Protection against harmful radiation
Visual comfort
Light is not only needed in the visual task area, but also for per-
ception in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform
brightness and lighting balance.
– Balanced brightness distribution

– Varying luminance levels
– Plasticity/modelling
– Discomfort glare
– Uniform illuminance in area around visual task
– Sense of security
– Artificial light complemented by daylight

– Use of flicker-free ballasts
Chapter 1 / 17
Vitality
Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-
being. Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may
even enhance or influence biological processes.
– Sense of well-being
– Activation and stimulation
– Circadian rhythm
– Lighting similar to daylight
– Avoiding danger spots
– Avoiding thermal radiation
– Electromagnetic fields
Empowerment
Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for
options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors
and control systems help users adjust the lighting situation to
their personal needs.
– Individual influence by switching and dimming

– Choice of lighting scene
– Presence detection
– Daylight-based control
– Choice of lighting scenarios
– Flexibility for layout changes
– Privacy
Use of the charts is described in Chapter 8 / 3–10 “Checklists”.

18 / Chapter 1
Calculation of energy efficiency (LENI)
The Lighting Energy Numeric Indicator (LENI) stands for a lighting
installation’s actual energy consumption in kWh per square
metre and year. LENI is calculated according to the normative
specifications of the EN 15193 standard.
Formula for calculating a lighting installation’s energy

consumption:
{-(Pn x FC) x {(tD x FO x FD) + (tN x FO)}
LENI = kWh/(year x m2)
A
Without elaborating on individual parameters in greater detail,
the following relevant factors are identified:
– the installed load (Pn)
– multiplied by the annual hours of use by day (tD) and at
night (tN)
– reduced by factors ( 1) for daylight-based control (FD),
presence-based control (FO) and use of a lighting control
system (FC)
– the area assessed (A)
LENI also takes charging energy for emergency lighting and
standby energy into account.
The following factors have a positive impact on the

reduction of energy consumption:
– Sensible control of lighting
– Use of daylight
– Use of presence detectors
– Intelligent consideration of hours of use
– Energy-efficient lamps
– Need-based use of luminaires and lighting solutions, specified
for the respective application
– Constant lighting control (maintenance control)
60 120
0 180
Energy consumption in kWh/(m year)
2
Chapter 1 / 19
Chapter 2
Standard values for indoor and
outdoor lighting
Standard values for lighting of indoor and

outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting . . . . . . . 2
Indoor workplaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 – 12
Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings . . . . 3
Industrial activities and crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–7
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Retail premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Places of public assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Educational premises. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
Health care premises . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 – 10
Transportational areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Sports facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 – 12
Outdoor workplaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 – 15
General circulation areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Airports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Building sites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Fuel filling service stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Industrial sites and storage areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Parking areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Petrochemical and other hazardous industries. . . . . . 14
Power, electricity, gas and heat plants . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Railway and tramways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 15
Saw mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Standard values for lighting of indoor and
outdoor workplaces and sports facility lighting
E m gives the illuminance maintenance values specified in the
European standards which partially or completely replace
national standards (e.g. DIN 5035, Austrian standard O 1040,
Swiss lighting standard SLG 8912, DIN 67526).
“Lighting of indoor workplaces”, EN 12464-1 (April 2003)
“Lighting of outdoorwork places”, EN 12464-2
(October 2007)
“Sports facility lighting”, EN 12193 (April 2008)
(see also “Definition of terminology”, Chapter 1 / 6)
Illuminance levels must not fall below the E m maintenance

values in the visual task area. If the precise location is not
known, the limit should be applied to the whole room or a
specific working area.
Example for an
office task task
area
area: height = 0.75 m
use
r flo
or-a
rea
1.00 m
The maintenance factors
can be determined on a case-by-case
basis from the manufacturer’s data (see also Chapter 8).
The maintenance factors and schedules for Zumtobel luminaires
are given in the Quickplan tables (Chapter 6).
Where no individual maintenance data is available, the following
values are recommended as reference maintenance factors for
modern technology and three-yearly maintenance: 0.67 in a
clean atmosphere, and 0.50 in very dirty environments.
EN 12464 specifies that the lighting designer must document
the maintenance factor and maintenance schedule.
UGRL is the upper limit for direct glare. The UGR value calculated
in the design process must lie below this (the Quickplan tables
give the UGR figure for the luminaire used in a medium-size
reference room).
Ra is the lower limit for the colour rendition index. The Ra of the
selected lamp must be equal to or greater than this value.
Type of interior,
task or activity Em UGRL Ra
Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings

Traffic zones
• Circulation areas and corridors 100 28 40
• Stairs, escalators, travolators 150 25 40
• Loading ramps/bays 150 25 40
Rest, sanitation and first aid rooms
• Canteens, pantries 200 22 80
• Rest rooms 100 22 80
• Rooms for physical exercise 300 22 80
• Cloakrooms, washrooms, bathrooms, toilets 200 25 80
• Sick bay 500 19 80
• Rooms for medical attention 500 16 90
Control rooms
• Plant rooms, switch gear rooms 200 25 60
• Telex, post room, switchboard 500 19 80
Store rooms, cold stores
• Store and stockrooms 100 25 60
• Dispatch packing handling areas 300 25 60
Storage rack areas
• Gangways: unmanned 20 – 40
• Gangways: manned 150 22 60
• Control stations 150 22 60
Industrial activities and crafts
Agriculture
• Loading and operating of goods, handling
equipment and machinery 200 25 80
• Buildings for livestock 50 – 40
• Sick animal pens; calving stalls 200 25 80
• Feed preparation; dairy; utensil washing 200 25 80
Bakeries
• Preparation and baking 300 22 80
• Finishing, glazing, decorating 500 22 80
Cement, cement goods, concrete, bricks
• Drying 50 28 20
• Preparation of materials; work on kilns
and mixers 200 28 40
• General machine work 300 25 80
• Rough forms 300 25 80
Ceramics, tiles, glass, glassware
• Drying 50 28 20
• Preparation, general machine work 300 25 80
• Enamelling, rolling, pressing, shaping
simple parts, glazing, glass blowing 300 25 80

• Grinding, engraving, glass polishing,
shaping precision parts, manufacture
of glass instruments 750 19 80
Chapter 2 / 3
Type of interior,
• Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand

grinding and engraving 750 16 80
• Precision work e.g. decorative grinding,
hand painting 1000 16 90
• Manufacture of synthetic precious stones 1500 16 90
Chemical, plastics and rubber industry
• Remote-operated processing installations 50 – 20
• Processing installations with limited manual
intervention 150 28 40
• Constantly manned work places in processing
installations 300 25 80
• Precision measuring rooms, laboratories 500 19 80
• Pharmaceutical production 500 22 80
• Tyre production 500 22 80
• Colour inspection 1000 16 90
• Cutting, finishing, inspection 750 19 80
Electrical industry
• Cable and wire manufacture 300 25 80
• Winding:
– large coils 300 25 80
– medium-sized coils 500 22 80
– small coils 750 19 80
• Coil impregnating 300 25 80
• Galvanising 300 25 80
• Assembly work:
– rough e.g. large transformers 300 25 80
– medium e.g. switchboards 500 22 80
– fine e.g. telephones 750 19 80
– precision e.g. measuring equipment 1000 16 80
• Electronic workshops, testing, adjusting 1500 16 80
Food stuffs and luxury food industry
• Work places and zones in
– breweries, malting floor
– for washing, barrel filling, cleaning, sieving,
peeling
– cooking in preserve and chocolate factories
– work places and zones in sugar factories
– for drying and fermenting raw tobacco,
fermentation cellar 200 25 80
• Sorting and washing of products, milling,
mixing, packing 300 25 80
• Work places and critical zones in slaughter
houses, butchers, dairies mills, on filtering
floor in sugar refineries 500 25 80
• Cutting and sorting of fruit and vegetables 300 25 80
• Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen

work, manufacture of cigars and cigarettes 500 22 80
4 / Chapter 2
Type of interior,
• Inspection of glasses and bottles, product

control, trimming, sorting, decoration 500 22 80
• Laboratories 500 19 80
Foundries and metal casting
• Man-size underfloor tunnels, cellars, etc. 50 – 20
• Platforms 100 25 40
• Sand preparation 200 25 80
• Dressing room 200 25 80
• Work places at cupola and mixer 200 25 80
• Casting bay 200 25 80
• Shake out areas 200 25 80
• Machine moulding 200 25 80
• Hand and core moulding 300 25 80
• Die casting 300 25 80
• Model building 500 22 80
Hairdressers
• Hairdressing 500 19 90
Jewellery manufacturing
• Working with precious stones 1500 16 90
• Manufacture of jewellery 1000 16 90
• Watch making (manual) 1500 16 80
• Watch making (automatic) 500 19 80
Laundries and dry cleaning
• Goods in, marking and sorting 300 25 80
• Washing and dry cleaning 300 25 80
• Ironing, pressing 300 25 80
• Inspection and repairs 750 19 80
Leather and leather goods
• Work on vats, barrels, pits 200 25 40
• Fleshing, skiving, rubbing, tumbling of skins 300 25 80
• Saddlery work, shoe manufacture: stitching,
sewing, polishing, shaping, cutting, punching 500 22 80
• Sorting 500 22 90
• Leather dyeing (machine) 500 22 80
• Quality control 1000 19 80
• Shoe making 500 22 80
• Glove making 500 22 80
Metal working and processing
• Open die forging 200 25 60
• Drop forging 300 25 60
• Welding 300 25 60
• Rough and average machining:
tolerances ≥ 0.1 mm 300 22 60

• Precision machining; grinding:
tolerances < 0.1 mm 500 19 60
• Scribing; inspection 750 19 60
Chapter 2 / 5
Type of interior,
• Wire and pipe drawing shops; cold forming 300 25 60

• Plate machining: thickness ≥ 5 mm 200 25 60
• Sheet metalwork: thickness < 5 mm 300 22 60
• Tool making; cutting equipment manufacture 750 19 60
• Assembly:
– rough 200 25 80
– medium 300 25 80
– fine 500 22 80
– precision 750 19 80
• Galvanising 300 25 80
• Surface preparation and painting 750 25 80
• Tool, template and jig making, precision
mechanics, micromechanics 1000 19 80
Paper and paper goods
• Edge runners, pulp mills 200 25 80
• Paper manufacture and processing, paper and
corrugating machines, cardboard manufacture 300 25 80
• Standard bookbinding work, e.g. folding, sorting,
gluing, cutting, embossing, sewing 500 22 80
Power stations
• Fuel supply plant 50 – 20
• Boiler house 100 28 40
• Machine halls 200 25 80
• Side rooms, e.g. pump rooms, condenser
rooms etc.; switchboards (inside buildings) 200 25 60
• Control rooms 500 16 80
• Outdoor switch gear 20 – 20
Printers
• Cutting, gilding, embossing, block engraving,
work on stones and platens, printing machines,
matrix making 500 19 80
• Paper sorting and hand printing 500 19 80
• Type setting, retouching, lithography 1000 19 80
• Colour inspection in multicoloured printing 1500 16 90
• Steel and copper engraving 2000 16 80
Rolling mills, iron and steel works
• Production plants without manual operation 50 – 20
• Production plants with occasional manual
operation 150 28 40
• Production plants with continuous manual
operation 200 25 80
• Slab Store 50 – 20
• Furnaces 200 25 20
• Mill train; coiler; shear line 300 25 40
• Control platforms; control panels 300 22 80

• Test, measurement and inspection 500 22 80
• Underfloor man-sized tunnels; belt sections;
cellars etc. 50 – 20
6 / Chapter 2
Type of interior,
Textile manufacture and processing

• Work places and zones in baths, bale opening 200 25 60
• Carding, washing, ironing, devilling machine work,
drawing, combing, sizing, card cutting,
pre-spinning, jute and hemp spinning 300 22 80
• Spinning, plying, reeling, winding 500 22 80
• Warping, weaving, braiding, knitting 500 22 80
• Sewing, fine knitting, taking up stitches 750 22 80
• Manual design, drawing patterns 750 22 90
• Finishing, dyeing 500 22 80
• Drying room 100 28 60
• Automatic fabric printing 500 25 80
• Burling, picking, trimming 1000 19 80
• Colour inspection; fabric control 1000 16 90
• Invisible mending 1500 19 90
• Hat manufacturing 500 22 80
Vehicle construction
• Body work and assembly 500 22 80
• Painting, spraying chamber, polishing chamber 750 22 80
• Painting: touch-up, inspection 1000 19 90
• Upholstery manufacture (manned) 1000 19 80
• Final inspection 1000 19 80
Wood working and processing
• Automatic processing e.g. drying,
plywood manufacturing 50 28 40
• Steam pits 150 28 40
• Saw frame 300 25 60
• Work at joiner’s bench, gluing, assembly 300 25 80
• Polishing, painting, fancy joinery 750 22 80
• Work on wood working machines e.g. turning,
fluting, dressing, rebating, grooving, cutting,
sawing, sinking 500 19 80
• Selection of veneer woods 750 22 90
• Marquetry, inlay work 750 22 90
• Quality control, inspection 1000 19 90
Offices
Offices
• Filing, copying, etc. 300 19 80
• Writing, typing, reading, data processing 500 19 80
• Technical drawing 750 16 80
• CAD work stations 500 19 80
• Conference and meeting rooms 500 19 80
• Reception desk 300 22 80
• Archives 200 25 80
Chapter 2 / 7
Type of interior,
Retail premises
Retail premises
• Sales area 300 22 80
• Till area 500 19 80
• Wrapper table 500 19 80
Places of public assembly
General areas
• Entrance halls 100 22 80
• Cloakrooms 200 25 80
• Lounges 200 22 80
• Ticket offices 300 22 80
Restaurants and hotels
• Reception/cashier desk, porters desk 300 22 80
• Kitchen 500 22 80
• Restaurant, dining room, function room – – 80
• Self-service restaurant 200 22 80
• Buffet 300 22 80
• Conference rooms 500 19 80
• Corridors 100 25 80
Theatres, concert halls, cinemas
• Practice rooms, dressing rooms 300 22 80
Trade fairs, exhibition halls
• General lighting 300 22 80
Museums
• Exhibits, insensitive to light according to
• Light sensitive exhibits requirements
Libraries
• Bookshelves 200 19 80
• Reading area 500 19 80
• Counters 500 19 80
Public car parks (indoor)
• In/out ramps (during the day) 300 25 20
• In/out ramps (at night) 75 25 20
• Traffic lanes 75 25 20
• Parking areas 75 – 20
• Ticket office 300 19 80
Educational premises
Nursery school, play school
• Play room 300 19 80
• Nursery 300 19 80
• Handicraft room 300 19 80
Educational buildings
• Classrooms, tutorial rooms 300 19 80
• Classroom for evening classes and adults
education 500 19 80
8 / Chapter 2
Type of interior,
• Lecture hall 500 19 80

• Black board 500 19 80
• Demonstration table 500 19 80
• Art rooms 500 19 80
• Art rooms in art schools 750 19 90
• Technical drawing rooms 750 16 80
• Practical rooms and laboratories 500 19 80
• Handicraft rooms 500 19 80
• Teaching workshop 500 19 80
• Music practice rooms 300 19 80
• Computer practice rooms (menu driven) 300 19 80
• Language laboratory 300 19 80
• Preparation rooms and workshops 500 22 80
• Entrance halls 200 22 80
• Circulation areas, corridors 100 25 80
• Stairs 150 25 80
• Student common rooms and assembly halls 200 22 80
• Teachers rooms 300 19 80
• Library: bookshelves 200 19 80
• Library: reading areas 500 19 80
• Stock rooms for teaching materials 100 25 80
• Sports halls, gymnasiums, swimming pools
(general use) 300 22 80
• School canteens 200 22 80
• Kitchen 500 22 80
Health care premises
Rooms for general use
• Waiting rooms 200 22 80
• Corridors: during the day 200 22 80
• Corridors: during the night 50 22 80
• Day rooms 200 22 80
Staff rooms
• Staff office 500 19 80
• Staff rooms 300 19 80
Wards, maternity wards
• Reading lighting 300 19 80
• Simple examinations 300 19 80
• Examination and treatment 1000 19 90
• Night lighting, observation lighting 5 – 80
• Bathrooms and toilets for patients 200 22 80
Examination rooms (general)

Eye examination rooms
• Examination of the outer eye 1000 – 90
Chapter 2 / 9
Type of interior,
• Reading and colour vision tests with vision

charts 500 16 90
Ear examination rooms
• Ear examination 1000 – 90
Scanner rooms
• Scanners with image enhancers and television
systems 50 19 80
Delivery rooms
Treatment rooms (general)
• Dialysis 500 19 80
• Dermatology 500 19 90
• Endoscopy rooms 300 19 80
• Plaster rooms 500 19 80
• Medical baths 300 19 80
• Massage and radiotherapy 300 19 80
Operating areas
• Pre-op and recovery rooms 500 19 90
• Operating theatre 1000 19 90
• Operating cavity
Intensive care unit
• Simple examinations 300 19 90
• Night watch 20 19 90
Dentists
• At the patient 1000 – 90
• Operating cavity 5000 – 90
• White teeth matching 5000 – 90
Laboratories and pharmacies
Decontamination rooms
• Sterilisation rooms 300 22 80
• Disinfection rooms 300 22 80
Autopsy rooms and mortuaries
• Autopsy table and dissecting table 5000 – 90
10 / Chapter 2
Type of interior,
Transportational areas
Airports
• Arrival and departure halls, baggage claim
areas 200 22 80
• Connecting areas, escalators, travolators 150 22 80
• Information desks, check-in desks 500 19 80
• Customs and passport control desks 500 19 80
• Waiting areas 200 22 80
• Luggage store rooms 200 25 80
• Security check areas 300 19 80
• Air traffic control tower 500 16 80
• Testing and repair hangars 500 22 80
• Engine test areas 500 22 80
• Measuring areas in hangars 500 22 80
Railway installations
• Covered platforms and passenger subways
(underpasses) 50 28 40
• Ticket hall and concourse 200 28 40
• Ticket and luggage offices and counters 300 19 80
• Waiting rooms 200 22 80
Sports facilities
The following details apply to competition class I (lower
requirements apply to classes II and III)
Em and Ra data according to European Standard EN 12193
General school sports data from EN 12464
An Ra level of 80 should be preferred
For lighting for training purposes, usually an UGRL level of 22
should be observed
• Aerobics 500 60
• Archery 200 60
• Athletics (all disciplines) 500 60
• Badminton 750 60
• Basketball 750 60
• Billards 750 80
• Boccia 300 60
• Boules 300 60
• Bowling 200 60
• Bowls 500 60
• Boxing (competition/training) 2000/300 80
• Climbing 500 60
• Cricket 750 60
• Cricket nets 1500 60
• Curling (target/playing area) 300/200 60

• Cycling 750 60
• Dancing (fitness) 500 60
• Darts 200 60
Chapter 2 / 11
Type of interior,
task or activity Em Ra
• Fencing 750 60
• Football (indoor) 750 60
• Gymnastics 500 60
• Handball 750 60
• Hockey 750 60
• Ice hockey 750 60
• Ice skating 750 60
• Judo 750 60
• Kendo/Karate 750 60
• Netball 750 60
• Petanque 300 60
• Racketball 750 60
• Riding 500 60
• Roller skating 500 60
• School sports 750 60
• Shooting 200 60
• Snooker 750 80
• Speed skating 500 60
• Squash 750 60
• Swimming 300 80
• Swimmung (school level) 500 60
• Table tennis 750 60
• Tennis 750 60
• Volleyball 750 60
• Weight lifting 750 60
• Wrestling 750 60
12 / Chapter 2
Type of area,
General circulation areas at outdoor workplaces

• Walkways exclusively for pedestrians 5 20
• Traffic areas for slowly moving vehicles max. (10 km/h),
e.g. bicycles, trucks and excavators 10 20
• Regular vehicle traffic (max. 40 km/h) 20 20
• Pedestrian passages, vehicle turning, loading and
unloading points 50 20
Airports
• Hangar apron 20 20
• Terminal apron 30 40
• Loading areas 50 40
• Fuel depot 50 40
• Aircraft maintenance stands 200 60
Building sites
• Clearance, excavation and loading 20 20
• Construction areas, drain pipes mounting, transport, auxiliary
and storage tasks 50 20
• Framework element mounting, light reinforcement work,
wooden mould and framework mounting, electric piping
and cabling 100 40
• Element jointing, demanding electrical, machine and
pipe mountings 200 40
Fuel filling stations
• Vehicle parking and storage areas 5 20
• Entry and exit driveways: dark environment (i.e. rural areas
and suburbs) 20 20
• Entry and exit driveways: light environment (i.e. cities) 50 20
• Air pressure and water checking points and other
service areas 150 20
• Meter reading area 150 20
Industrial sites and storage areas
• Short term handling of large units and raw materials,
loading and unloading of solid bulk goods 20 20
• Continuous handling of large units and raw materials,
loading and unloading of freight, lifting and descending
location for cranes, open loading platforms 50 20
• Reading of addresses, covered loading platforms,
use of tools, ordinary reinforcement and casting
tasks in concrete plants 100 20
• Demanding electrical, machine and piping
installations, inspection 200 60
Chapter 2 / 13
Type of area,
Parking areas
• Light traffic, e.g. parking areas of shops, terraced and
apartment houses; cycle parks 5 20
• Medium traffic, e.g. parking areas of department stores,
office buildings, plants, sports and multipurpose building
complexes 10 20
• Heavy traffic, e.g. parking areas of schools, churches, major
shopping centres, major sports and multipurpose
building complexes 50 20
Petrochemical and other hazardous industries
• Handling of servicing tools, utilisation of manually regulated
valves, starting and stopping motors, lighting of burners 20 20
• Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons
with risk free substances, inspection of leakage,
piping and packing 50 20
• Filling and emptying of container trucks and wagons
with dangerous substances, replacements of pump
packing, general service work, reading of instruments 100 40
• Fuel loading and unloading sites 100 20
• Repair of machines and electric devices 200 60
Power, electricity, gas and heat plants
• Pedestrian movements within electrically safe areas 5 20
• Handling of servicing tools, coal 20 20
• Overall inspection 50 20
• General servicing work and reading of instruments 100 40
• Wind tunnels: servicing and maintenance 100 40
• Repair of electric devices 200 60
Railways and tramways
Railway areas including light railways, tramways, monorails,
miniature rails, metro, etc.
• Tracks in passenger station areas, including stabling 10 20
• Railway yards: flat marshalling, retarder and classification
yards 10 20
• Hump areas 10 20
• Freight track, short duration operations 10 20
• Open platforms, rural and local trains, small number of
passengers 15 20
• Walkways 20 20
• Level crossings 20 20
• Open platforms, suburban and regional trains with large
number of passengers or inter-city services with small number
of passengers 20 20
• Freight track, continuous operation 20 20

• Open platforms in freight areas 20 20
• Servicing trains and locomotives 20 40
• Railway yards handling areas 30 20
14 / Chapter 2
Type of area,
• Coupling area 30 20
• Stairs, small and medium-size stations 50 40
• Open platforms, inter-city services 50 20
• Covered platforms, suburban or regional trains or inter-city
services with small number of passengers 50 40
• Covered platforms in freight areas, short duration operations 50 20
• Covered platforms, inter-city services 100 40
• Stairs, large stations 100 40
• Covered platforms in freight areas, continuous operation 100 40
• Inspection pit 100 40
Saw mills
• Timber handling on land and in water, sawdust and
chip conveyors 20 20
• Sorting of timber on land or in water, timber unloading
points and sawn timber loading points, mechanical
lifting to timber conveyor, stacking 50 20
• Reading of addresses and markings of sawn timber 100 40
• Grading and packaging 200 40
• Feeding into stripping and chopping machines 300 40
Extracts from
Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-1

Light and lighting –
lighting of workplaces – Part 1:
indoor workplaces (2003-04-01)
Austrian Standard (ÖNORM) EN 12464-2

lighting of workplaces – Part 2:
outdoor workplaces (2007-10-01)
Austrian Standard (ÖNORM EN 12193)

sports facility lighting (2008-04-01)
published with permission by the Austrian Standards Institute,

A-1020 Vienna, Heinestrasse 38
Ordering of standards and products, as well as research on the subject at
www.on-norm.at
Chapter 2 / 15
Chapter 3
Products (selection)
ZUMTOBEL applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5

Spots and tracks
(SOLAR II, VIVO; VIVO-S + VIVO-SL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–9
LIGHTTOOLS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 – 11
CARDAN-SPIRIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 13
STARFLEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 17
2LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 – 23
PANOS L and H. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 – 25
PANOS M/MWW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
PANOS S and Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 – 28
PANOS range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
PASO II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 – 31
VAERO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 – 33
LIGHT FIELDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 – 35
MELLOW LIGHT IV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 – 37
CIELOS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 – 39
CLARIS II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 – 41
RTX II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 – 43
MIRAL T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 – 45
FREELINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 – 47
Free-standing uplights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 – 49
LED luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 – 57
SYSTEMLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 – 59
ORILED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 – 61
HELISSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 – 63
TECTON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 – 67
SOLINA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 – 69
PERLUCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 – 71
SCUBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 – 73
CLEAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 – 75
ZBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 – 77
ONLITE/ONLITE RESCLITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 – 85
BELIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 – 87
TETTOIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 – 89
Areas of application
Throughout the world, sional interior lighting

ZUMTOBEL is the compe- – providing global com-
tent reliable partner petence, superior product
for innovative lighting quality and future-
solutions in all areas of proof technologies.
application of profes-
Industry and Engineering

In production, the greatest
demands are placed on the
flexibility, functionality and
building management system
of industrial buildings. The right
light in manufacturing and
assembly bays as well as ware-
houses and workshops is the
basis for any productive work.
Offices and Communication

Spatial structures and lighting
systems must be adapted to
new types of work. What is
required are flexible people,
flexible architecture and flexible
light which enhances com-
munication and motivation and
improves the quality of working
and spending time at the office.
Education and Science

Using light to enhance commu-
nication, improve awareness
and create social understand-
ing: dynamic lighting solutions
with optimum colour properties
enhance people’s concentra-

tion and improve visual comfort
in educational facilities.
www.zumtobel.com/applications Chapter 3 / 3
Presentation and Retail
Modern retail worlds must
provide a quality of experi-
ence, their design becomes
an expression of the brand
message. Customised light-
ing solutions are an essential
element of these worlds of
experience.
Hotel and Wellness

Those who collect stars for
their restaurant or hotel
should not only work on their
recipes. The guests’ pleasure
starts with the lighting that
stimulates all senses.
Art and Culture

Where the highest architec-
tural requirements must be
met, ever greater demands
are also made on the ele-
ment without which room
impression and artistic delight
are inconceivable: light as a
modulating, accentuating fac-
tor of experience.
Health and Care

Light increases the patients’
sense of wellbeing, creates a
living-room ambience, supports
the accomplishment of visual
tasks in different therapies
and examination procedures,
makes orientation easier and

ensures safety in circulation
areas – in hospitals, sanatori-
ums and retirement homes.
4 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/applications
Sport and Leisure
For each type of sport, special
requirements must be met in
terms of lighting. Optimum
lighting has to ensure the
safety of athletes and the best
possible viewing conditions for
those performing, the audi-
ence and the referees.
Transit Areas and Parking

Light is ideal to bring a more
pleasant touch to utility build-
ings. Leaving one’s car in a
safely lit car park not only
ensures that the paintwork
will not be scratched but also
that the driver will have a good
feeling.
Orientation and Safety

Lighting provides safety and
ensures (self-)reliability:
escape sign luminaires in a
sophisticated design, and
emergency lighting systems as
an integral concept including
the lighting management and
service systems.
www.zumtobel.com/applications Chapter 3 / 5
Spots and tracks –
An unbeatable team
3-phase track DALI track
– high professionalism due to – 3-phase track with built-in

variety of switching options control lines for tapping DALI
– broad range of connectors control signals
for any type of track configu- – spotlights with DALI control
ration gear can be individually
– track can be easily installed dimmed and switched at
on ceiling or wall; suspension zero power, independent of
from cord or pendant tube power supply
– tracks can be bent to specific – for each track, up to 64 DALI
radii; exception: tracks with spots can be separately con-
supporting section trolled
– acceptable: tracks used – impressive, dynamic shows
within manual reach and lighting sequences can
be run in combination with
the EMOTION touch panel by
ZUMTOBEL
In lighting technology, tracks interplay of dramatic bright-

and continuous row lighting ness variations can be staged,
systems are vital components while spotlights fitted with
providing the basis for active colour filters allow to set the
light design. Using DALI, stage for pleasant choreo-
impressive lighting scenarios graphies of coloured light.
can be created. A fascinating
6 / Chapter 3 www.zumtobel.com/productsites
SOLAR II – New generation –
flowing lines, organic design
Application:
A generation of expressive
spotlights with soft and flowing
lines for accent and display
lighting in
– shops & display windows
– galleries & showrooms
– private settings
Design by Massimo Iosa Ghini
Models:
– Spotlight system in two – low-voltage halogen
design sizes, in die-cast incandescent lamps up to
aluminium, titanium or 100 W
white, fitted with electronic – metal halide lamps 20 W
control gear only for use to 70 W
with state-of-the-art lamp – wide range of accessories
technology: that can be combined
Pros:
– universal 3-phase adapter – organic design
by ZUMTOBEL – AFPS (AirFlow Protection
– new generation of reflec- System): increases reli-
tors with four different ability of electronic ballasts,
beam angles, designed as extends service life of
interchangeable reflectors lamps
Benefits:
– safe, convenient operation – installation on DALI tracks
thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new with DALI transformer, and
universal 3-phase adapter appropriate DALI adapters
– can be quickly adjusted for easy integration with
to changing lighting tasks digital lighting management
using a wide range of inter- systems
changeable reflectors
www.zumtobel.com/productsites Chapter 3 / 7
VIVO – Light’s intuitive freedom
of movement
Application:
ZUMTOBEL spotlight range for
accent and display lighting.
A real all-rounder for
– shops, display windows &
retail areas
– department stores & super-
markets
– galleries & showrooms Design by EOOS
– private settings
Models:
– Spotlight system in three – low-voltage halogen
design sizes, made of die- incandescent lamps up to
cast aluminium, silver or 100 W
white, microstructure paint. – metal halide lamps 20 W
Fitted with electronic control to 150 W
gear only for use with state- – high-pressure sodium dis-
of-the-art lamp technology: charge lamps up to 100 W
– wide range of accessories,
also for lighting foodstuffs
Pros:
– interchangeable reflectors – track box fitted parallel to
– integral ball-and-socket joint track ensures uncluttered
– universal 3-phase adapter look on ceiling
by ZUMTOBEL
Benefits:
– can be quickly adjusted – bayonet joint ensures mini-
to changing lighting tasks mum maintenance of lamps
using a wide range of inter- and easy replacement of
changeable reflectors reflectors and accessories
– safe, convenient operation – installation on DALI tracks
thanks to ZUMTOBEL’s new with DALI transformer, and
universal 3-phase adapter appropriate DALI adapters
– intuitive, precise adjustment for easy integration with

by means of integral clip digital lighting management
systems
VIVO-S and VIVO-SL – Spotlight system with
three hundred and sixty degrees precision
Models:
– Recessed spotlight; spotlight – HIT G8.5 35/70 W and
head pivots from position QT 90 W lamps
flush with ceiling to 90º – electronic ballast must be
– 2 design sizes: round and ordered separately
square
Pros for VIVO-S:

– pivots through up to 90°
– rotates through 360°
– pivots to position flush with
ceiling
– pivots progressively
– Squeeze, Move and Retain
(SMART) system for intuitive
alignment
Pros for VIVO-SL:

– freedom of design, also in
case of low-profile ceilings
– pivots through up to 50°
– Squeeze, Move and Retain
(SMART) system for intuitive
alignment
Benefits:
– complete solution – VIVO is a real all-rounder
combining ceiling-mounted mastering every lighting
module and track task in shops and stores
– highly flexible, architectur-
ally consistent lighting
concept
LIGHTTOOLS – Modular lighting system:
inconspicuous, easy to install, and versatile
System range:
– lighting channel, flush-
mounted, no flange
– lighting channel, ceiling-bear-
ing, with flange
– lighting inserts for various

spotlight applications
– lighting inserts for floodlight-
ing and wide-area lighting
– all lighting inserts can be
clicked in and positioned with-
out the use of tools
– electrical connection via plug-
in contact (no tools required)
Design by
Application: Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte
– shops & display windows
– foyers & corridor areas
– showrooms & galleries
– offices & office areas
Benefits: Material/design:
– only 100 mm wide, but with – channel sections in alu-
HIT up to 70 W minium extrusion, U-shape,
– installed flush with ceiling assembled using 3 sections
(plasterboard ceilings), no – luminaire housing made of
flange bent sheet steel
– assembly of lengths on site – lighting heads made of die-
– lighting inserts to be installed cast aluminium
and shifted without any tools – floodlight housing made of
– prepared for operation with extruded aluminium section
DALI (integral bus line) – electronic control gear
– extremely easy design (optional: DALI gear)
(optional aid: configurator)
– delivery ex warehouse, no
special lengths required
Lamp(s): Spotlight – HIT-TC-CE/up to 70 W Spot & Flood
– QT-LP 12/90 W Spot & Flood
– QR-LP 70/50 W
Floodlight – HIT-CE G12/70 W
– HST GX12/100 W
Linear – T 16 24 up to 54 W, DL & WF
3 pros:
Current design
– reduced to a minimum in – building management
material thanks to DALI integration:
– extremely easy planning in – integral bus line in chan-
advance, as exact definition nel as standard
of lengths not required until – control gear installed
on site optionally
Easy installation
– only few components need – “endless” cable duct up
to be installed to 25 m, can be clicked
– no additional connectors in without use of tools,
required ensures minimum installa-
– lighting inserts can be fitted tion effort
without use of tools
Versatility
– suitable for all types of ceil- – as a “closed” channel
ings: (gaps closed by cover sec-
– without flange for plaster- tions)
board ceilings
– ceiling-bearing (with
flange) for all other ceilings
– various different channel
looks:
– with pivoting lighting heads
– with flush lighting heads
– as an “open” channel (gap

between lighting inserts
open)
CARDAN-SPIRIT – Modular lighting system:
unobtrusive and flexible
System range:
Ceiling-recessed luminaires
– autonomous design accord-
ing to the SPIRIT spotlight
range
– fitted with up to 4 x 70 W HIT
– extremely flat design of
model fitted with QR111
– wide range of technical
lighting accessories
– easy replacement of reflec-
tors
Lighting frame
– autonomous, unique design
– high illumination output: up
to 4 x 70 W HIT
– can be fitted with mixed
lamps Application:
– wide range of technical – upmarket shops & shop
lighting accessories windows
– DALI-compatible (inc. RGB – foyers & corridor areas
colour changes) – showrooms & galleries
– can be installed in different – entrance & office areas
locations in a room: – prestigious private settings
– horizontally suspended
– vertically suspended Design by
– installed on wall/ceiling Studio Jean-Michel Wilmotte
Lighting technology:
– lighting heads for no-tool – in lighting frames in particular:
reflector replacement – built-in electronic ballasts,
– silver-colour spot & flood separately for each lamp
specular reflectors – DALI version (transformers
– complete range of accesso- & bus feed line) available
ries for the “Spirit” spotlight if required
range can be used – RGB model as “stand-alone”
– lighting heads pivot on gim- version also available upon

bals through approx. 2 x 45° request
Range/lamp(s):
Ceiling-recessed luminaires Lighting frame
– 1-lamp, round – 2-lamp to 4-lamp
– 1-lamp to 4-lamp, square – QR 111/100 W FLAT
– QR 111/100 W (also FLAT) – QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood
– QT 12/100 W Spot & Flood – HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W
– HIT-TC-CE 35 + 70 W Spot & Flood
Spot & Flood – electronic ballasts included
– separate ballasts
(accessories)
3 Pros:
Functionality Variety of creative design
– complete SPIRIT accesso- options
ries can be fitted – recessed into ceiling
– accessories replaced from – horizontally & vertically
the front (lamps & reflectors suspended
& filters) – installed on wall & under-
– ventilation of lighting head neath the ceiling
ensures optimum thermal
conditions
Lighting technology
– Spirit lighting head as base
– power packages:
up to 4 x 70 W HIT
– can be fitted with mixed
lamps
– prepared for DALI
integration
– FLAT version for QR 111
STARFLEX – The modular fibre optic system
Fibre optic technology provides as well as a variety of accesso-
fascinating options for precise, ries allow to create customised
impressive display lighting. A lighting solutions for numerous
broad product range including applications.
light engines and optical fibres
Models:
Engines
– halogen QR-CBC 50–100 W
light engines
– HIT 35–250 W light engines
– HIT 150/250 W light engines,
controllable
(DALI; 1–10 V; DMX)
Light outlets
– decorative crystal light heads
– pivoting surface-mounted and
recessed lenses with defined
beam angle
– IP-protected light outlets for
outdoor and underwater appli-
cations
– projection heads for extremely
narrow-beam lighting as well
as slide and gobo projections
Optical fibre
– fibre with terminal light emis-
sion (glass; Schott Spectraflex)
– fibre with terminal light emis-
sion (PMMA; Mitsubishi)
– side-radiating fibre (PMMA,
Mitsubishi)
Accessories
– colour and colour temperature
correction filters
– colour and sparkle-effect

wheel modules
– control lines and input units
Benefits:
– precise direction of light – separation of light and
– colour temperature can be electricity, UV and IR compo-
adjusted to meet special nents
project requirements – projection of logos or slides
– broad range of light engines – modular design for
from 35 W to 250 W, for customised project solutions
indoor and outdoor areas as
well as damp areas
Pros:
STARFLEX for presentation and retail
– maintenance-friendly and – UV/IR-free lighting of fashion
space-saving (e. g. display items, foodstuffs or
cases with alarm system) jewellery/watches
– can be integrated with light- – precise illumination of
ing management solutions display windows and show-
via control line of bus sys- cases
tem
STARFLEX for art and culture

– conservational lighting with- – precise narrow-beam
out UV and IR components illumination with sharp out-
– light colour adjusted via cor- lines via appropriate outlets
responding light sources and
fibre material
STARFLEX for wellness and fitness areas

– underwater lighting in swim- – lighting of applications pro-
ming pools, wells and ponds viding accents (water film on
stainless steel sheets, etc.)
STARFLEX projection
– Projection e. g.: at the
cinema, for product adver-
tising or visitor information
in shops, museums and gal-
leries based on fibre optics
Properties and applications of optical fibres
Fibre Properties Applications

material
Glass – can withstand relatively high – glass display cases in
temperatures (up to 110 °C) museums
– extremely long service life – saunas and steam baths
(in excess of 20 years) – hotel and restaurant
– relatively tight bending radius lighting
– projects preferring
relatively warm light colour
PMMA – cheaper than glass – applications requiring
– life time in excess of high levels of
20 years illumination
– projects involving relatively – retail shop windows,
cool light colour display shelving and
– choice of side-radiating or show cases
terminal light emitting fibres – starry skies in hotels
– side-radiating and terminal and wellness areas
light-emitting fibres can be – outdoor lighting or in
combined in a single fibre areas with high air
bundle humidity
– fibre bundle can optionally
be assembled on site
Assembly of glass fibre bundles
Active Outer diameter Maximum number Minimum

diameter of of sheathing of individual fibres bending
fibre cable per common end radius
spigot
1.0 mm 2.2 mm 615 7 mm
1.5 mm 2.7 mm 307 11 mm
2.0 mm 3.9 mm 176 14 mm
3.0 mm 4.9 mm 79 21 mm
4.5 mm 6.4 mm 36 32 mm
6.0 mm 8.7 mm 20 42 mm
Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for glass fibre

cables
1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 9 m 10 m
0.93 0.87 0.81 0.76 0.71 0.66 0.62 0.57 0.54 0.50
Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles
(terminal light emission, factory-assembled)
Active Outer diameter Maximum number Minimum

diameter of of sheathing of individual fibres bending
fibre cable per common end radius
spigot crimped/
spliced
1.0 mm 2.2 mm 575/300 8 mm
1.5 mm 2.7 mm 342/165 12 mm
2.0 mm 4.0 mm 143/70 16 mm
3.0 mm 5.0 mm 72/35 24 mm
4.5 mm 6.5 mm 37/18 36 mm
6.0 mm 8.5 mm 20/10 48 mm
8.0 mm 10.5 mm 13/6 60 mm
10.0 mm 12.0 mm 8/4 75 mm
Length-based correction factors (attenuation) for PMMA cables

1m 2m 3m 4m 5m 6m 7m 8m 9 m 10 m
0.95 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.65 0.62
Assembly of PMMA fibre bundles

(side radiation, factory-assembled)
Outer diameter Maximum number of Maximum number of

of sheathing individual fibres per individual fibres per
common end spigot common end spigot
(crimped) (spliced)
4.5 mm 80 40
8.0 mm 19 10
11.0 mm 11 5
14.0 mm 6 3
2LIGHT – High-quality downlight system
2LIGHT MINI Application:
– unique, high-quality display lighting, restaurants,
MINIATURE downlight cafeterias, bars, reception
system for accent lighting areas, hotels, residential
properties
2LIGHT-C MINI (CARDAN) Application:

– unique, high-quality sales counters, small presen-
MINIATURE downlight sys- tation areas, points of sale,
tem for accent lighting shelf lighting
– maximum application flex-
ibility thanks to integral
pivoting lamp units
2LIGHT MINI, surface- Application:

mounted display lighting, reception
– unique, high-quality areas, corridors, foyers and all
MINIATURE downlight sys- other applications for which
tem for accent lighting surface-mounted luminaires
– surface-mounted housing can be used
can be installed quickly
using CLIX mechanism
2LIGHT Application:
– unique, high-quality down- reception areas, waiting areas,
light system for wide-area restaurants, corridors, foyers,
general lighting conference rooms, relaxation
areas, shopping arcades
2LIGHT-C (CARDAN) Application:
– unique high-quality down- shops, retail areas, presenta-
light system for accent tion areas, museums
lighting
– maximum application flex-
ibility thanks to integral
pivoting lamp units
2LIGHT MDW (multi-direc- Application:

tional wallwasher) corridors, offices,
– innovative, fully flexible conference rooms, waiting
wallwasher reflector tech- areas, restaurants
nology for brightening up
vertical areas
Design by Hartmut S. Engel
Impressive looks
Winner of the 2005 iF Design
Award
– unobtrusive, flat aluminium
frame in titanium colour
– high-quality printed safety
glass panel
– unique Mellow Downlight
effect
Benefits: Easiest possible mainte-
nance/easy handling
2LIGHT has a completely
closed housing. At the same
time, 2LIGHT is light-tight in
the ceiling. The unique Easy-
Clean catch enables quick and
easy relamping.
Unique technical lighting

features
innovative principle of reflector
splitting
– diffuse light: a special
matt-sanded plastic panel
behind the safety glass
ensures a matched soft
light component around the
reflector. Soft, pleasantly
bright light is provided.
– direct reflector light: light
component directed down-
wards via facetted reflector.
Models: 2LIGHT 2LIGHT-C 2LIGHT MDW
(fixed) (pivots on (multi-directional
gimbals) wallwasher)
2LIGHT MINI
single
module
2LIGHT MINI
double
module
2LIGHT MINI
triple
module
2LIGHT MINI
surface-
mounted
2LIGHT
single
module
2LIGHT
double
module
2LIGHT
triple
module
Type Module size Mounting depth Lamp(s) Accessories Protection class
2LIGHT MINI 118 x 118 mm 100 mm CDM-TM 20/35 W Colour filter IP 44
2LIGHT-C MINI QT-LP to 75 W Casting surround
Overview:
Mounting kit for thin ceilings
22 / Chapter 3
Interchangeable reflectors
2LIGHT MINI 118 x 118 mm 120 mm LED WN/WW or Mounting kit for thin ceilings IP 44
single module LED RGB/W new!
2LIGHT-C MINI 256 x 118 mm 103 mm CDM-TM 20/35 W Colour filter IP 44
double module QT-LP to 50 W Mounting kit for thin ceilings
2LIGHT-C MINI 373 x 118 mm 103 mm CDM-TM 20/35 W Colour filter IP 44
triple module QT-LP to 50 W Mounting kit for thin ceilings
2LIGHT MINI 127 x 127 mm x – CDM-TM 20/35 W Colour filter IP 40
Surface-mounted (height) 175 mm QT-LP to 75 W
2LIGHT/ 216 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 1x32/42 W Colour filter for soft light component IP 44
2LIGHT MDW HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W Casting surround
single module HIT-CE 1x35/70 W Mounting kit for thin ceilings
Multi Directional Wallwasher
www.zumtobel.com/productsites
2LIGHT MDW HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W Casting surround
double module HIT-CE 2x35/70 W Mounting kit for thin ceilings
Multi Directional Wallwasher
2LIGHT MDW TC-L 1x80 W/2x55 W Casting surround
triple module T-16 3x24 W Mounting kit for thin ceilings
HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W Multi Directional Wallwasher
HIT-CE 3x35/70 W
2LIGHT-C 216 x 216 mm 152 mm TC-TELI 1x32/42 W Colour filter for soft light component IP 44
single module HIT-TC-CE 1x20/35/70 W and directional light
Casting surround
double module HIT-TC-CE 2x20/35/70 W and directional light
Casting surround
triple module HIT-TC-CE 3x20/35/70 W and directional light
Casting surround
Chapter 3 / 23
PANOS L and H – Multi-talented downlights
PANOS L
– recessed depth of just
100 mm
– maximum efficiency levels
PANOS H
– satisfies the most stringent
glare limitation requirements
without the need for acces-
sories
Reflectors and their applications
HF/LF HG/LG
The precision-shaped facets Highly specular darklight
provide brilliant effects, re- reflector optic for glare-free
duced luminance levels and working at the highest level.
optimum efficiency.
HM/LM HL/LL
Good looks are guaranteed by The white reflector optic is a
this matt reflector optic with perfect match for the decora-
reduced dust sensitivity. tive accessories.
Design by Sottsass Associati
HWW
The special ribbed structure
of the reflector produces
asymmetrical light distribution,

ideal for highlighting vertical
surfaces.
PSP+® (Pure Silver Plated+) – brilliant new
finish for downlight with silber-plated reflector
What is innova- – glare control in conformity
tive about the with EN 12464 standard,
®
new PSP+ surface is already without using technical
revealed by its name: Pure lighting accessories
Silver Plated+ –100 % silver, – optimum reflection
so-called high-purity silver, is of heat
precisely applied onto the – longer lamp service life
high-quality polycarbonate thanks to reduced tem-
reflectors of the PANOS L+H peratures
ranges by means of sputtering, – ideal temperature man-
and sealed. Facetted, smooth agement allows lamps to
and wallwasher finishes are operate in optimum output
available. range
Benefits: – innovative surface stability

– tremendous light output – extremely durable and
– light output ratio increased ultra-hard reflector sur-
by as much as 21% face
– increased lighting level – excellent maintenance
leads to reduced mainte- qualities
nance factor – iridescence-free reflector
Finest aluminium and silver plating by sputtering

Sputtering is a unique, high- fect glare control and ideal
quality 4-chamber metal- light distribution
lising process applied at high – high-quality appearance
vacuum. with darklight effect and
iridescence-free reflector
Benefits: – extremely easy mainte-
– optimum lighting effect at nance and easy cleaning
high efficiency levels, per-
Installation instructions
No-tool installation installed by means of a “twist
The mounting ring made of and lock mechanism” without
die-cast aluminium is fitted any tools. The ballast box has a
without tools using spring clips. rapid locking device and forms
a pre-assembled luminaire unit

Combined refl./flange unit with the reflector.
The reflector/flange unit is
PANOS M/MWW –
Impressive and powerful
PANOS M
Metal reflector for high tem-
perature resistance. Mounting
rings and cooling attachments
made of die-cast aluminium.
Ideal for use with lamps that
generate a lot of heat.
PANOS M LG/HG and

PANOS M LM/HM
Outstanding surface properties
and optimum thermal manage-
ment ensure maximum lumi-
nous flux when fitted with 2 x
42 W TC-TELI. The luminaire
is light-tight in the ceiling, and
can be operated completely
closed with IP54. It is ideal for
use with strict fire regulations.
PANOS MWW
As regards its look on the
ceiling, the wallwasher with
asymmetrical light distribution
is not different from rotation-
ally symmetrical luminaires.
It does not interfere with the
interior design.
Wide range of lamps

With the wide range of lamps
that can be fitted, PANOS M
and MWW give lighting
designers maximum freedom

for professionally setting the
lighting stage.
PANOS S – Incredibly versatile, providing
more freedom for vertical adjustment
With PANOS S fully As the lighting head For illumination of

swivelled out to 60°, and the housing are different levels of
it is possible to illu- separately adjustable, shelving, PANOS S
minate a wall from specific areas can can be swivelled
its top edge. be shaded. into the ceiling by up
to 45°.
Suitable reflectors for any situation

Comparing light distribution/room: length 5 m, height 3 m
Accent lighting by PANOS S150
with HIT G8.5
4 x PANOS S150 FL 70 W
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500
Accent lighting by PANOS S200

with HIT G12
4 x PANOS S200 FL 70 W
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500
Wallwashing by PANOS S250

with HIT-DE
500 700 900 1100 1300 1500

3 x PANOS S250 70 W
PANOS Q – Square downlight for uncompromis-
ing looks and lighting technology
Perfect one-piece reflec-
tor base
Consistently square reflector,
light-tight, made of high-qual-
ity UV-resistant polycarbonate
for perfect light distribution.
Persuasive freedom of
design
– various reflector optics: – trendy attachments fitted
faceted, smooth, matt and as block or frame
painted – suspended attachment and
– various cover frames: technical lighting acces-
white, titanium, chromium, sories
frameless
PANOS Q Low PANOS Q High
Reflector models
faceted smooth matt white
Frame models frameless model

titanium chrome white
Attachments Attachments
Less installation time

– PANOS no-tool quick
installation
– “shift & lock” system for
fixing cover frame
– quick and easy subsequent
installation of attachements
Type Ceiling cut-out Light sources Reflector optic Light distribution Features
PANOS L 175/200/250 faceted, smooth, high light output ratio, mounting depth only
painted, matt 100 mm, variety of surface finishes
PANOS H faceted, smooth, perfect glare control, DSE-compatible
painted, matt, without attachment, illumination of
wallwasher vertical areas
PANOS M 100/150/200/250 smooth, partly huge variety of light sources, consistent
structrured appearance, flat circular design
PANOS M LG/HG 200/250 smooth, general lighting with high wattages,
PANOS M LM/HM matt lhousing light-tight
PANOS MWW 150/200 asymmetrical uniform illumination of vertical areas,
Overview of the PANOS range
calm, uniform ceiling look

PANOS S 100/150/200/250 spot, flood uncompromising flexibility, can be swivelled
in and out, highly convenient control
PANOS A/AD Surface-mounted faceted, smooth, for ceilings without mounting depth,
painted, matt, reduced building and installation costs,
wallwasher large variety of surface finishes
PANOS Q 190/190 faceted, smooth, perfect one-piece reflector base, optimum,
250/250 painted, matt glare control (DSE-compatible), exceptional,
design freedom (colours + attachments)
PANOS LED 150 smooth, painted 1000 lm/2000 lm white light or
matt 1000 lm BioMotion 2700/6500 K, high
light output ratio, perfect glare control, long
Chapter 3 / 29
service life, energy-efficient, IR/UV-free light
PASO II – Recessed floor luminaire system
PASO II knows just how to round or square. A generous
hit all the right buttons when helping of lighting technology
it comes to setting dramatic packed into models ranging in
contemporary lighting scenes size from small to large allows
whilst nevertheless remaining fine-tuning to provide custom-
unobtrusive itself. The lumi- ised lighting solutions.
naire housing and covers are
Models:
PASO II D/Q 120
– LED with LEDOS board units
and PowerLED
– QR-CBC and PAR 16
– “MicroLynxF” 7 W compact (120 mm Ø or side length)
fluorescent lamps
PASO II D/Q 190

– QR-CBC and QR 111
– TC-TEL compact fluorescent
lamps (190 mm Ø or side length)
– HIT-TC-CE 20 W
PASO II D/Q 260

– PAR 38
– TC-TEL compact fluorescent
lamps
– LED floor lighting tile
– HIT up to 70 W, HST 50 W (260 mm Ø or side length)
Application:
– shops & display windows – prestigious private settings,
– galleries & showrooms indoor and outdoor areas
– hotels & wellness
Benefits:
– flush with floor or overlap- – patented sealing system to
ping frame without visible protect against penetration
screw heads of surface water
– “glass-only” model – various technical lighting
– models with reduced sur- accessories

face temperature to protect
people and property
Pros:
PASO II with LED technology – luminaires with PowerLEDs
– luminaires with LED boards for lighting columns
for decorative pinpoint light- – lighting tile with variable
ing in static version or with RGB colours, for recess into
variable RGB colours floor
PASO II –
everything
in the right
light
Guiding light Spot and superspot
Floodlighting Wallwashers
PASO II extra low-profile

design
Use in screeded floors, without 100 mm
impacting on the structural cal-
culations of concrete ceilings
PASO II D/Q range, low-profile design

190 mm 260 mm 370 mm
HIT 20 W HIT 20 W HIT bis 70 W
compact fluorescent lamps compact fluorescent lamps compact fluorescent lamps
up to 10 W TC-DEL up to 18 W TC-DEL up to 18 W TC-DEL/TC-F 36 W
PASO II accessories for an impressive yet safe presence

– colour filters for coloured – honeycomb meshes for glare
accent lighting control
– casting surround for quick – IR blocking filters for reducing
and safe installation surface temperature
– mounting kit for cavity floors/ – anti-slip glass panel available
hollow ceilings for fixing PASO upon request

II luminaires with overlapping – IP 67 general-purpose box for
frame cover external control gear (PASO II S)
VAERO – Waveguide luminaire providing
soothing light for people and rooms
Design by Hartmut S. Engel
Ingeniously designed VAERO mum energy efficiency.

waveguide luminaire with MPO 2 designs available – struc-
lighting technology for maxi- tured and homogeneous.
Balance between energy it forms an optical system that

efficiency and lighting ensures glare control in con-
quality formity with relevant standards
The sandwich construction at flat angles (EN 12464) and
of the micropyramidal optic reduced luminance at steep
lets the light really sparkle. angles.
Together with two other layers,
Diffusor layer
Micro-pyramidal layer
for directing light
Base
The “Photometric examina-

tion of new lighting systems”
research carried out at TU
Ilmenau demonstrates that
systems using MPO technol- Via adjustable reflectors, the
ogy obtain excellent values light distribution curve of the
with respect to contrasts in the luminaire’s indirect component

room, in the task area and on can be adjusted to the suspen-
the screen. sion height of the luminaire.
Lighting quality created by
contrast engineering
Contrasts in the room major impact, too. Balanced

Brightness perceived at the luminance levels create a
workplace is determined not pleasant, natural working
only by illuminance – in fact, atmosphere.
ceilings and walls have a
Contrasts between ceiling harmoniously into the bright-

and luminaire ness pattern of the ceiling.
Bright ceilings open up a The variable pendant length of
room. The luminaires and VAERO and adjustable indirect
their luminance levels blend components are unique.
Contrast rendition in the The reduced luminance of the

task area MPO diffuser helps to improve
Visual contrasts in the task contrast rendition (see TU
area are determined by lumi- Ilmenau research).
nance ratios, e. g. ink colour on
background.
Contrast rendition on free from annoying reflections.

screens Thanks to the MPO diffuser
In every location, and no mat- – and reduced luminance –,
ter what the angle of inclina- the viewability of computer
tion, screens must remain screens is excellent.
LIGHT FIELDS – Modular micro-pyramidal
lighting system
Design by Sottsass Associati

Pure innovation for the office
Micro-pyramidal optic
Even in surface-mounted
and recessed luminaires, the
sandwich construction of the
micro-pyramidal optic ensures
both glare control in conformity
with standards and reduced
luminance for direct illumination
– ideal for office lighting accord-
ing to standard EN 12464.
base
micro-pyramidal layer
for directing the light
diffuser layer
Available as recessed/surface-mounted/pendant/
free-standing or cluster luminaires, they are ideal for
the more stylish office, with EN 12464 compliance
over a range of ceiling heights and floor areas.
Recessed Surface- ID pendant Free-standing

mounted luminaire
1198 x 298 1248 x 310 1248 x 310 3/55 W TCL
2/28 W T16 2/28 W T16 2/54 W T16
M 600
1498 x 298 1548 x 310 1548 x 310 3/80 W TCL

2/35 W T16 2/35 W T16 2/49 W T16
598 x 598 623 x 623 623 x 623
4/14 W T16 4/14 W T16 4/24 W T16
1248 x 310
2/28 W T16
M 625
1548 x 310
2/35 W T16
623 x 623
4/14 W T16
LIGHT FIELDS model 1-person 2-person 3-person

office office office
Recessed
L-FIELDS E 4 x 4/14 W T16 • •
L-FIELDS E 4 x 2/28 W T16 •
Surface-mounted
L-FIELDS A 4 x 4/14 W T16 • •
L-FIELDS A 4 x 2/28 W T16 •
L-FIELDS A 3 x 2/35 W T16 • •

MELLOW LIGHT IV – A piece of sky
Balance, energy efficiency and lighting quality
Owing to their light distribu-
tion characteristics, MELLOW
LIGHT IV surface-mounted and
recessed luminaires bring a
“piece of sky” into the room.
Design by Studio & Partners
Technical lighting features: of uniformity achieved on

– bright visible luminance the useful plane, but room
levels create an attractive peripheries such as ceilings
impression of brightness and walls can be selectively
– light is distributed uniformly brightened up as well. This
in the room. In the pro- allows for active brightness
cess, not only is a high level management.
100
Efficiency level Efficiency level

of 57 %: of 67 %:
MELLOW LIGHT IV 50 MELLOW LIGHT IV
with slotted sheet with slotted sheet steel
steel controller optic controller optic and
and 55 W TC-L lamp 0 two 24 W T5 lamps
100
Efficiency level of Effiency level of

more than 70 %: more than 80 %:
MELLOW LIGHT IV 50 MELLOW LIGHT IV
with micro- with micro-
prismatic optic and prismatic optic and
55 W TC-L lamp 0 two 24 W T5 lamps
Bright, pleasant room impression …or “cave effect” with conven-

with MELLOW LIGHT IV… tional solutions using louvre
luminaires.
Application and glare Direct and reflected glare on
control upright and steeply inclined
displays is minimised, allow-
ing for lighting solutions in
conformity with the EN 12464
standard.
0 – 10 0 – 40 40 – 90 55 – 90 65 – 90
Organizer Displays Laptops Flatscreens Conventional
display
The more strongly inclined a computer display is, the

higher are the requirements for glare control of the light-
ing system – in particular where it has been installed
directly above the workstation.
Micro-prismatic optic with – in line with the basic

cross pattern concept of Mellow Light
– innovative optic for maximum – screening prevents direct
energy efficiency view of light source
– gentle light for ergonomically – ideal for upright and inclined
beneficial lighting conditions displays (luminance reduced
– in line with the basic at all angles of view)
concept of Mellow Light – free arrangement in the
– screening prevents direct room, without taking posi-
view of light source tion of workstation into
– ideal for upright and inclined account (demonstrated by
displays (luminance reduced TU Ilmenau research)
at all angles of view)
– free arrangement in the Louvre optic
room, without taking posi- – classic with louvre technol-
tion of workstation into ogy in conformity with
account (demonstrated by relevant standards
TU Illmenau research) – combination of proven, effi-
cient louvre technology and
Slotted sheet steel the typical gentle lighting
controller optic effects of Mellow Light
– design-oriented slotted sheet – glare control for upright dis-
steel controller optic plays meets specifications
– gentle light for ergonomically of EN12464 (with or without

beneficial lighting conditions extra filter, depending on
luminaire model)
CIELOS – Modular luminous ceiling for
creating designs with light and colour
Design by
Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners
Application:
Luminous ceilings capture our – entrance areas
attention. Wide-area, diffuse – conference and meeting
lighting fascinates the viewer. rooms
Combined with selective – shops
accents, a room’s ambience
can be changed radically.
Models:
– 2 heights: 80 mm and – 600 x 600 mm
150 mm 900 x 900 mm
– 80 mm for white and – dynamic colour changes,
monochrome controlled via EMOTION
– 150 mm for RGB Touch
– from 4/14 W to 12/21 W
Pros:
Conventional luminous ceilings
use almost no lighting technol-
ogy at all. They rely exclusively
on maximum clearance
between lamp and diffuser
in order to produce uniform
illumination.
Mounting heights often range

from 300 to 700 mm, yet
hardly any of these luminous
ceilings offers the same colour
neutrality and infinite colour
spectrum as CIELOS.
Coloured lamps or sheathing

the T16 light sources in col-
oured film produces coloured
light. Special coloured films
that emit especially intense,
pure light were developed for
CIELOS. They are available
as accessories in the three
primary colours red, green and
blue. Any other coloured film
suitable for use in luminaires
can also be used.
CLARIS II – Luminaire system
Minimised design with improved
technical lighting features. Its
angular shape and clear lines
are unmistakable features of
CLARIS II.
Complete range:
– indirect/direct pendant
luminaire
– surface-mounted luminaire
– wallwasher
Application:
– offices and schools Design by ag Licht, Bonn
Lighting technology:
– miniature cell louvre used – meets requirements for
– DSE-compatible luminaire lighting of office areas
according to EN 12464
Optics for all applications:

Darklight louvre Opal diffuser
– specular louvre ensures – closed luminaire
ideal glare control according – diffuse light distribution
to EN 12464 – harmoniously soft light
Matt comfort louvre creates communicative
– bright, friendly room room atmosphere
atmosphere
– in conformity with EN 12464
standard
Surface finishes: Easy design:

powder-coated titanium or easy design is ensured by
natural anodised finish standard module lengths
Practical technology
Lamps are replaced straight-
forwardly from the top of
the luminaire. Thanks to the
convenient lever, releasing and
replacing the light source is
child’s play.
Installation: time is money

Invisible height adjustment
inside, adjustment in longitu-
dinal direction
All inclusive
Luminaire includes pre-installed
suspension assembly, trans-
parent connecting cable
already fitted, light source
already integrated, plus
protective film
Can be used for

continuous row lighting
CLARIS II configurations
Continuous row luminaires
(pendant luminaires):
– indirect/direct
– direct only
– indirect only
– wallwasher
300 225
Connectors for
continuous design
225
225
300 300
300
150
RTX II –
Design-oriented continuous row lighting system
Design by Charles Keller Individual luminaires and

Avant-garde in terms of both continuous row systems:
material and shape – Pure aluminium
– Matt bivergent or darklight
Application: offices and reflector optic
schools – Wallwasher for illuminating
blackboards
– Decorative optics
Typical applications
RTX II-C
1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W
Day school
Technical college/
evening school
Office
Office with DSE
Open-plan office
Technical drawing
RTX II-D
1/35W 1/49W 1/54W 1/80W 2/28W 2/35W 2/49W 2/54W
Day school
Technical college/
evening school
Office
Office with DSE

Open-plan office
Technical drawing
RTX II Wallwasher
RTX II 1 x 49 W
RTX II 1 x 54 W
RTX II 1 x 80 W
RTX II 2 x 28 W
RTX II 2 x 35 W
RTX II 2 x 49 W
RTX II 2 x 54 W
300 Lux
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40
(Day school)
blackboard –
luminaire distance [m]
optimum
range
possible
range
possible range under

certain conditions*
* Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and

luminaire arrangement.
RTX II 1 x 80 W
RTX II 2 x 49 W
RTX II 2 x 54 W
500 Lux
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20 1.40
(Evening school
and technical blackboard –
luminaire distance [m]
colleges)
optimum
range
possible
range
possible range under

certain conditions*
* Use strongly depends on architectural parameters and

luminaire arrangement.
MIRAL T16 – Surface-mounted louvre luminaire
Complete louvre luminaire range:
– surface-mounted luminaire
– indirect/direct pendant luminaire
– wallwasher
Application: offices, schools, shops
Benefits: – BIVERGENZ® plus lighting technology

– quick installation thanks to
– mounting bracket
– externally located terminal block
– pre-fitted lamp
– protective film
Lay in Fold up Snap in
Design by Studio Ambrozus

Light source included Electrical connection
MIRAL T16 is pre-fitted with Quick installation is also guar-
an LF840 lamp (option- anteed thanks to the exactly
ally LF830). This keeps centered 5-pole plug-in terminal
the installation effort to a (CE-compliant) easily accessible
minimum, saving the time, from outside the luminaire.
resources and energy that Thus the connecting cable can
would otherwise be spent on be fitted conveniently and in
lamp procurement, transport minimum time without needing
and temporary storage. to open the luminaire housing.
Packaging Protective film
The mounting brackets are A special self-adhesive protective
located ready for use outside film made of recyclable material
the box so there is no need offers optimum protection against
to open it. Advantage: the louvre soiling. MIRAL T16 can
luminaire remains protected therefore be fully installed whilst
in its packaging during pre- building work is still in progress,
installation. and even used to light the con-
struction site. Once the building

is finished, simply pull away the
film which leaves no residue.
Traditional MIRAL T16
installation installation
Traditional installation for the electri-

cian meant four trips up and down
the ladder, two operations with the
electric screwdriver.
MIRAL T16 installation for the elec-

trician means getting the same result
in half the time!
FREELINE – The TASK AREA luminaire
– TASK AREA luminaire for
task area-related indirect/
direct lighting
– luminaires are arranged
between room axes, directly
above workstation and at
right angle to window
– one luminaire per work-
station ensures lighting
conditions in conformity with
relevant standards Design by Ingenhoven and
Partner Architekten
FREELINE (matt bivergent louvre)

FREELINE (MPO technology)
Lighting technology: matt – Designed by:
bivergent louvre for optimum IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek
lighting conditions at the Architekten)/Düsseldorf
workstation
– Dimensions:
– Wattages: length 2436 mm (54 W) or
1/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 length 2736 mm (80 W)
1/80 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 width 98 mm
2/54 W + 2 x 2/24 W T16 height 62 mm
Models with electronic weight: 4.5 kg
ballast, DALI-dimmable
or dimming-on-demand – Material:
function (LDoD) extruded aluminium, natural
anodised finish
Lighting technology: – Designed by:

micro-pyramidal optic with IOA (Ingenhoven Overdiek
glare-free light radiation Architekten)/Düsseldorf
characteristics
– Dimensions:
– Wattages: length 2436 mm (54 W) or
2 x 1/49 W T16 length 3036 mm (80 W)
2 x 1/54 W T16 width 98 mm
2 x 1/80 W T16 height 62 mm
Models with electronic weight: 4.5 kg
ballast, DALI-dimmable
or dimming-on-demand – Material:
function (LDoD) extruded aluminium, natural
anodised finish
Free-standing uplights –
LIGHT FIELDS-S, MINIUM LITE, KAREA, LANOS ...
Free-standing uplights …
… provide maximum flexibility … can be personalised, are
when changing or reorga- customised and energy-
nising one’s place; efficient;
… can be positioned freely at … can be installed quickly,

the workplace; easily, as required and
independent of the build-
… focus light onto the visual ing;
task area;
… don’t have to be installed
on/in the ceiling, allow for
low level heights.
LIGHT FIELDS-S MINIUM LITE

Brilliant light thanks to inno- Max. energy efficiency and
vative MPO-PLUS technology reduced installed load
Design by Design by
Sottsass Associati Engel & Zimmermann
– indirect/direct distribution – indirect/direct distribution

– asymmetrical indirect com- – 2 x 1/55 W or
ponent 2 x 1/80 W TC-L
– 3/55 W or 3/80 W TC-L – large direct component with
– direct component via micro- cell louvre in darklight or matt
pyramidal optic comfort optic
– glare reduction – glare reduction
L<1000 cd/m2 (3/55 W) L<1000 cd/m2
– reflector can be swung open – two separate luminaire heads
for easy cleaning made of anodised aluminium
– flat luminaire head made of – heads pre-assembled for
anodised aluminium extremely quick installation
– backlit decorative frame – stand made of anodised

attached aluminium
– U-shaped steel base
KAREA LANOS
Flexible design – Pleasant lighting effect in
unobtrusive appearance a classic design
Design by DaCosta & Wolf Design by DaCosta & Wolf
– indirect/direct distribution – indirect/direct distribution

– 4/55 W TC-L – 4/55 W TC-L
– direct component via – luminaire head with lateral
perforated metal optic perforated metal refractors
– flat luminaire head – rounded aluminium stand
– angular aluminium stand with asymmetrical or
with asym. or symmetrical symmetrical luminaire-head
luminaire-head connection connection
– U-shaped or square base – U-shaped or square steel
(steel) base
– colours: titanium, or silver – colours: titanium, or silver
microstructure paint microstructure paint
– available in heights of – available in heights of
1850 mm or 2000 mm 1850 mm or 2000 mm
SwitchDim and SensControl SwitchDim

allow users to adjust the Simple dimming and switching
lighting to meet their using momentary-action switches
personal requirements.
From simple switching SensControl
and dimming through to Fully automatic control based on
fully automatic control daylight and the user’s presence
using presence detectors
and brightness sensors, SensControl-DALI
free-standing uplights by additional option for link to
ZUMTOBEL provide the per- LITENET lighting management
fect solution meeting any systems
requirement. SensControl-
DALI goes even further
by using DALI to integrate
the free-standing uplight

into the building’s lighting
management system.
LED luminaires – From semiconductor
to lighting innovation
Static and dynamic light
Benefits of LED technology:

– long service life = – high colour stability
low maintenance costs – efficient control thanks to
– low power consumption = simple control system
minimum operating costs – low heat generation
– vibration and impact-proof – light without IR/UV
– compact size
Benefits of LED technology in In comparison with low-volt-

comparison with low-voltage age halogen, light without
halogen IR/UV in particular, and
consequently the absence of
any heat radiation, is one of
the main benefits. The energy
efficiency of LEDs greatly
exceeds that of low-voltage
halogen luminaires.
Benefits of LED technology in In comparison with compact

comparison with fluorescent fluorescent lamps, the ben-
lamps efits are slightly smaller. In
addition to conservational
lighting and long maintenance
intervals, projected light is a
main benefit. The light can
be optimally directed into the
area required by means of
lens optics, which means that
the illumination output can be
used much more efficiently.
Moreover, cove lighting in
dynamic colours can be gen-
erated in a space-saving and
energy-efficient manner, e.g.
by means of LED RGB lighting

solutions.
Limits of LED technology Today, the LED is less energy-
efficient than the following
lamp technologies:
– fluorescent lamps:
80–100 lm/W
– high-pressure halogen
lamps: 90–100 lm/W
– high-pressure sodium
vapour lamps:
100–120 lm/W
– LEDs: 40–80 lm/W
LEDs don’t like high ambient

temperatures. If LEDs are
used at high ambient temper-
atures (e.g. sauna, etc.), this
will strongly effect luminous
flux and reduce the LEDs’
service life. High-performance
LEDs generate a lot of heat at
the board side.
In order to ensure a service
life of 50,000 hours for an
LED luminaire, the boards
must be properly cooled (e.g.
cooling fins, ventilator or water
cooling).
Typical Properties
applications
– 1000 lm projected light
– colour temperature adjustable from 2700–6500 K
– “stand-alone” variation has a 4-button control panel for
setting colour temperature with six pre-defined steps
– RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX

– RGB colour dynamism via DMX
– 1000 lm and 2000 lm as an alternative to 18 W/26 W

compact fluorescent lamps
– colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K

– RGB colour dynamism via EMOTION touch panel or DMX
– swivelling recessed downlights for decorative accent

lighting
– 350 lm projected light as an alternative to 20 W low

voltage halogen
– indirect RGB light for “mellow downlight” effect in
dynamic colours
– 1000 lm as an alternative to 18 W compact fluorescent

lamps
– colour temperatures of 3000 K and 4000 K
– 1100 lm projected light with 3000 K

– 1300 lm projected light with 4000 K
– projected LED accent light as an alternative to 75 W low
voltage halogen
* with 24 V and 350 mA luminaires, dimmability is dependent upon type of control gear!
Supply Switchable/ Monochrome/ Indoor/outdoor Product
dimmable* RGB applications
230 V switchable, control of white indoor applica-
dimmable DALI light via RGB tions
(via Emotion RGB
touch panel),
dimmable DMX
TEMPURA spotlight
230 V dimmable DALI, control of white indoor applica-

dimmable DMX light via RGB tions
RGB
TEMPURA downlight
230 V switchable, white indoor applica-

dimmable DALI tions
PANOS PureWhite
230 V dimmable DALI control of white indoor applica-

(via Emotion light via RGB tions
touch panel) RGB
PANOS BioMotion
350 mA switchable, white indoor applica-

dimmable blue tions
PANOS S
24 V switchable, RGB + white indoor applica-

dimmable DALI tions
2LIGHT MINI RGB/W

dimmable DALI tions
2LIGHT MINI PureWh.

dimmable DALI tions
(via Emotion
touch panel)
VIVO LED
Typical Properties
applications
– 3000 K and 4700 K colour temperatures
– system combines miniaturised LED spots for accent

lighting with T16 fluorescent lamps for wallwashing
– LED light lines for room illumination and atmospheric
lighting effects
– single and nine-fold modules

– nine-fold modules feature dynamic light design whereby
the individual lighting cubes can be randomly dimmed
up and down
– colour temperature via control button in six pre-defined

steps from 2700–6500 K
– luminaire is part of the SCONFINE pendant luminaire
series
– illuminance in accordance with EN 1838 for additional

emergency lighting close to ground level
– unique lens/reflector optic ensures optimal light distribu-
tion on the floor
– available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5000 K
– modular LED light line system for individual, slot and

channel mounting
– not suitable for installation in floors!
– modular LED light line system for individual, slot and

channel mounting
– SYSTEMLED Deco Basic optimised for cove lighting
– not suitable for installation in floors!
– IP 68 version for underwater lighting

– walk-over capacity to max. 1000 kg
dimmable tions
MICROS

230 V dimmable RGB tions
(light lines) (light lines)
SUPERSYSTEM
230 V switchable monochrome indoor applica-

tions
SCONFINE CUBO

dimmable tions
SCONFINE SFERA

350 mA dimmable blue tions
outdoor applica-
tions
ORILED

dimmable blue tions
RGB outdoor applica-
tions
SYSTEMLED FLOOD

dimmable blue tions
tions
SYSTEMLED DECO
230 V switchable, yellow indoor applica-

24 V dimmable red tions
green outdoor applica-
white tions
blue
LEDOS M
Typical Properties
applications
– 8 mm mounting depth allows installation in parquet, tiles
and laminated flooring
– suitable for installation in furniture
– accent spotlight (spot/flood)

– available in colour temperature of 3000 K/5700 K

– uniformly illuminated light points or surfaces
– diffuser with transparent sides gives the luminaire unit a

floating appearance
– model without frame also available
– extremely easy wiring via self-tapping cable connector

for indoor applications

– RGB models feature integrated DALI power supply unit
– also available as a wall-mounted version
– also available as a decorative floor lighting tile (IP 67)
– “glass only” model available for indoor applications

dimmable blue tions
LEDOS O

24 V dimmable blue tions
350 mA RGB outdoor applica-
tions
LEDOS B

tions
LEDOS

tions
LEDOS II
230 V switchable, yellow indoor applica-

24 V dimmable red tions
green outdoor applica-
white tions
blue
RGB KAVA LED

RGB dimmable blue tions
DALI RGB outdoor applica-
tions
PHAOS LINE
24 V dimmable RGB indoor applica-

tions
PHAOS lighting tile

350 mA RGB outdoor applica-
tions
PASO II LED
SYSTEMLED – Modular LED light lines
SYSTEMLED is a modular LED uisite to reach a service life of

system for decorative light up to 50,000 hours!
lines or wide-area illumination
of walls. Pre-assembled plug- Varied accessories including
in connectors at the modules a mounting channel, mount-
help to reduce sources of ing springs and a diffuser
error during installation, and provide for a wide range of
minimise installation effort. applications. SYSTEMLED can
The use of aluminium sections be used in both indoor and
ensures optimum cooling of outdoor areas.
LED boards, which is a prereq-
Channel installation:
No-tool wiring using cables
with pre-configured connec-
tors.
Using special steel springs,

the modules are fitted in the
channel or wall and ceiling
cut-out without the use of
any tools.
Options for installation:
Pre-assembled modules in light lines uniformly illuminated
various lengths allow to flexibly by means of a diffuser.
adjust the light lines to project- FLOODLINE provides uniform
specific sections. illumination of vertical areas
DECOLINE is perfect for illumi- (wallwashing).
nating coves and for creating
individual slot channel diffuser*

installation installation installation
DECOLINE IP 40 • • • •
DECOLINE IP 65 • •
FLOODLINE IP 40 • • •
FLOODLINE IP 65 •
* In DECOLINE IP 40, the diffuser is clipped onto the LED module.
For DECOLINE IP 65, modules are supplied optionally with transparent or
diffuse optic.
SYSTEMLED Deco:
Clip-on diffuser for
perfect uniformity.
SYSTEMLED Deco Basic:

Easy to install in the cove
thanks to ready-to-connect
modules inc. connecting
cables.
ORILED – Orientation lighting close to
ground level with LED
ORILED Functional is fitted
with an LED optic (patent
pending) that provides illumi-
nance in conformity with the
EN 1838 standard.
ORILED Decorative, with its
warm or blue light colour, is
used in areas where the focus In emergency cases, too, addi-
is on a decorative lighting tional escape route lighting is
effect. By using different con- ensured via a central battery
trol gear, the luminaires can be or 1 h/3 h separate battery
easily integrated into building packs.
management systems such
as LUXMATE or the ONLITE The luminaires with IP 65
emergency lighting system. protection can be used for a
broad range of applications.
A variety of accessories is
available for easy luminaire
installation.
ORILED Functional: light distribution at ground level
Besides its two 1 W LEDs, the
secret of ORILED’s excellent
illuminance is, in particular,
its reflector combined with its
unique lens optic.
By means of flexible mounting

brackets, the luminaires are
fixed in the wall cut-out, bol-
lard, or in the surface-mounted
housing, mounting frame or
casting surround.
The stainless steel frame is

fixed to the luminaire hous-
ing via CAMLOCK fasteners.
ORILED therefore has no visible
screw heads.
Bollard with recessed Recessed housing with flush-

350 mA luminaire fitted luminaire
HELISSA – Stylish appearance with individuality
for indoor and outdoor areas
The decorative HELISSA optics, a discreet indirect light
wall/ceiling mounted lumin- component creates a white or
aire with protection types coloured lighting corona on
IP 40 and IP 65 sets both the wall or ceiling. Emergency
indoor and outdoor areas lighting and dimmable models,
masterfully centre stage while too, can be easily installed and
saving energy. In addition to maintained.
round or square glare-free
HELISSA round HELISSA square
Application: ning environments, wellness

– indoor areas such as cor- areas)
ridors, stairs and waiting – outdoor areas around the
areas house, entrance areas
– applications in temporarily – public spaces
or permanently humid/damp All applications, from inside
environments (e.g. station to outside, can be imple-
concourses) mented in the same, high-
– aggressive environments quality design using one
(chlorine or saline-contai- luminaire range!
Models:
Model Size Lamp(s)
HELISSA IP 40 D/Q 360 2/9 W TC-SEL
1/22 W T16-R
D/Q 450 1/55 W T16-R
2/18 W TC-L
HELISSA IP 65 D/Q 360 1/22 W T16-R
2/18 W TC-DEL
Benefits/pros:
high-quality and efficient – concealed screws
– optimum materials for the – decorative cover frame
respective application area: optionally in white, titanium
– HELISSA IP 40: sheet steel or aluminium, brightly pol-
fitting, rugged polycarbo- ished/with protective coating
nate diffuser
– HELISSA IP 65: die-cast economically efficient and
aluminium fitting, frosted flexible
glass diffuser – luminaires are optionally
– glare-free and uniform illu- switchable or analog/digit-
mination ally dimmable
– high energy efficiency; – models in all design sizes/
compact/fluorescent lamps versions are available in the
operated exclusively with same design and size with
electronic ballast built-in 1 h or 3 h emer-
gency lighting unit
convenient and versatile – all components are accom-
– easy installation modated in the fitting
– HELISSA IP 40: round
fitting, diffuser unit (dif- All these features give
fuser + aluminium frame) HELISSA its unmistakable
can be installed without individuality.
tools thanks to twist and
lock mechanism
– HELISSA IP 65: round or
square fitting with silicone
seal and glass cover, cover
frame is fixed without tools
by means of CamLock
fasteners
Accessories:
Set of foil filters (red, blue,
yellow) to create corona
For more creative scope, the

lighting corona’s colour can be
changed by fitting foil filters.
TECTON – Continuous-row lighting system
TECTON Compact
TECTON Retail
TECTON-I Industry
Design by
Nicholas Grimshaw & Partners
TECTON provides flexibility
Layout changes occur at ever Technical alterations to the

shorter intervals in retail, busi- lighting can also be made on
ness and industry, demanding site, with 11-pole wiring allow-
maximum flexibility from any ing any modifications in terms
continuous-row lighting sys- of brightness control or emer-
tem. TECTON allows the lumi- gency lighting supply in
naire modules to be placed conformity with relevant
anywhere on the trunking. standards.
TECTON saves on installation costs
“The easier, the better”. The All components can be com-

specially designed power con- bined logically and simply in
ductor integrated in the trunk- the modular system, reducing
ing revolutionises installation, TECTON installation costs by
making TECTON both versatile up to 60 percent through time
and easy to handle. Not only savings, depending on the
does this save time, but lower continuous row configuration
qualified and hence cheaper chosen.
staff can do the work.
TECTON provides safety
TECTON provides safety in – By the ONLITE emergency

several ways: luminaire range that can
– At the design stage, by the be fully customized to the
integration of mains light- TECTON system for safety
ing, emergency lighting and and reliability of the lighting
control; solution in conformity with
– By the clear separation of relevant standards.
emergency and escape-sign
luminaires in two emer-
gency-lighting circuits;
TECTON – High-pressure modules for shops,
hypermarkets and supermarkets
TECTON-H RBS TECTON-H RSR

The module for flexible lighting Making homogeneous illumi-
concepts: with the swivelling nated areas and wall surfaces
luminaire head, it is easy to come alive: using lighting
respond to any changes in technology with asymmetrical
room layout. Thanks to wide- distribution, it is possible to
angle lighting technology, retail create lighting focuses and, for
islands can be created using instance, precisely accentuate
directed light, also enabling shelves.
optimum illumination of gon-
dola heads.
TECTON-H R TECTON-H RSRA

A high-pressure module that The surface-mounted model
provides highlights: wide-angle adds refreshing lighting
or narrow-beam lighting tech- accents for the illumination
nology strikingly emphasises of counters and fresh goods.
seasonal and pallet goods Light with asymmetrical dis-
using directional light, pin- tribution in combination with
pointed and brilliant. special accessories such as
UVA, IR, meat and cold-meat
filters makes the goods dis-

played appear delicious and
tempting.
TECTON – Decorative optics
With its innovative darklight minia-
ture cell louvre made of aluminised
polycarbonate, the indirect/direct
optic provides a new interpretation
of ID lighting in a continuous-row
lighting system. Featuring a 50 %
indirect and 50 % direct light
component, it is ideal for use in
demanding office applications and
at POS terminals in retail areas.
The MELLOW LIGHT optic with its

lighting chamber in diffuser pearl
material and a slotted grid-mesh
optic provides appropriately glare-
reduced light with visible luminance
levels. Specific applications include
prestigious and retail areas with
high aesthetic requirements.
The wide-angle, purely indirect

lighting characteristics of the
indirect optic ensure uniformly
illuminated ceilings, preferably
in long corridor areas. Providing
ambient lighting, it is also ideal for
combination with accent lighting
in retail areas.
The pool-light optic made of

opal plastic impresses with har-
monious, wide-area luminance
levels on softly rounded surfaces.
It is a perfect choice for wellness
areas, sophisticated zonal lighting
in retail areas, or cool ambient

lighting at the bar.
SOLINA – The new high-bay reflector luminaire
The new SOLINA high-bay
reflector luminaire boasts a
striking cylindrical design, a
relatively small height (34 cm),
a die-cast aluminium housing
(for the first time ever, direct
and indirect lighting are com-
bined in a high-bay reflector
luminaire), and also includes
a version for direct installation
on the ceiling.
Design by Charles Keller
Application:
– shop/retail, with focus on – industrial lighting, as tra-
lighting fresh products ditional high-bay reflector
– architecture-centred luminaire
luminaire with ceiling illu-
mination
Benefits:
– both lighting types, direct – colour sequences possible
and indirect, can be sepa- via LED RGB combined
rately switched and dimmed with EMOTION touch panel
– same lamp and reflector or other DALI-controlled
range as COPA D systems
– additionally reflector painted – colour sequences possible
in titanium via LED RGB, as indirect
– one unit – variety of installa- lighting components
tion options (cord, pendant, – static colour situations
chain, adapter) possible via indirect colour
– direct installation on the filters in red and blue
ceiling
– accessories: IP 54 glass
cover, prismatic glass cover
– 2 food filters (M/CM+IR)

– 2 coloured indirect filters
(red + blue)
One unit – a variety of
mounting options:
– cord
– pendant
– chain
– adapter
– direct installation on the
ceiling
Installation benefits:
– easy and simple installation,
largely without tools
– luminaire prewired, no-tool
electrical installation on
plug-in terminal in place
– twist and lock mechanism
makes closing luminaire
easy
Models:
– indirect lighting optionally: – reflectors: plastic reflector
22 W T-R 5, LED-RGB (translucent or painted in
– direct lighting optionally: titanium), prismatic reflector
42–57 W TC-TELI, and metal reflector (also
60–250 W QT 32, available in titanium-painted
70–150 W HIT, finish)
85 W QL, 100 W HST
PERLUCE – Closed lighting system with
excellent maintenance factor
Closed surface-mounted luminaire with
increased protection type IP 50 (IP 54)
PERLUCE Opal
– optional colour accents
– excellent light output ratio
– uniform, fully flexible light
emission
– smooth surfaces, easy to clean
– excellent maintenance factor
PERLUCE louvre
– first closed surface-mounted
louvre luminaire available on
the market
– optional colour accents
– excellent light output ratio
– suitable for high visual
requirements
– maintenance factor better than
in open louvre luminaires
– smooth surfaces, easy to clean
– lamp and louvre protected
against soiling Design by Studio Ambrozus
Application:
– louvre: for high visual – opal: circulation areas,
requirements in rooms staircases, waiting rooms,
where dust and dirt are wellness areas, changing
present, e. g. workshops, rooms, nursery schools and
laboratories, kitchens, class- canteens

rooms and nursery schools
Lighting technology: Quality:
– T16 technology with elec- – 1-lamp and 2-lamp models
tronic ballast in same housing
– louvre: Bivergence plus – – excellent light output ratio
darklight louvre, reduced and homogeneous illumina-
luminance levels of tion of luminaire
L < 1000 cd/m2 at 65°, – injection-moulded optic
UGR < 19 or < 16 acc. to (generally thin luminaire
EN 12464; ceiling bright- walls)
ened up by laterally perfo- – high stability of optic
rated upper reflector – end-to-end installation
– opal: opal optic, without gaps
UGR < 22 or < 25 acc. to – luminaries can be opened
EN 12464 easily, even when mounted
end to end
Models:
PERLUCE linear PERLUCE wallwasher PERLUCE square
Opal/louvre Opal
1/14 W T16 (IP 50) 1/35 W T16 (IP 54) 2/18 W TC-L (IP 50/54)
1/24 W T16 (IP 50) 1/49 W T16 (IP 54) 4/14 W TC-L (IP 50/54)
1/28 W T16 (IP 50)
1/35 W T16 (IP 50/54) 1/80 W T16 (IP 54)
1/49 W T16 (IP 50/54)
1/54 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/35 W T16 (IP 54)
1/80 W T16 (IP 50/54) 2/49 W T16 (IP 54)
2/14 W T16 (IP 50)
2/28 W T16 (IP 50)
2/35 W T16 (IP 50)
2/49 W T16 (IP 50/54)
Protection type Protection type Protection type
IP 50 standard IP 54 standard IP 50 standard
(IP 54) (IP 54)
SCUBA – Moisture-proof diffuser luminaire with
impressive problem-solving skills
Moisture-proof diffuser lumi- Designed by
naire boasting impressive Massimo Iosa
problem-solving skills (SCII, Ghini
PC, PMMA, CHEMO diffuser,
plastic catches, 15° slope,
high-temperature and low-
temperature versions) and a
unique, innovative design
S Shockproof
language (oval, aerodynamic),
C Chemically resistant
in various IP 65 applications
(dust-proof and jet-proof). U UV-stable
Materials use are optionally B Benefit-orientated
PC, PMMA, CHEMO for diffus- A Application-orientated
ers, and polyester (GRP) for

the basic housing. SCUBA is ance, chemical resistance, UV-
the successor of FZ and IFP, stability, user-friendliness and
and stands for impact resist- application-orientation.
Benefits:
– smooth/ergonomic surfaces – unique, innovative design
and catches language
– 15° slope of all visible sur- – high light output ratio thanks
faces (recommended for food to calculated, optimised pris-
industry) matic structure
– innovative sealing rim between – optionally with heavy-duty
basic housing and diffuser electronic ballast for longer
– special CHEMO diffuser service life at high ambient
(combines benefits of PC and temperatures
PMMA)
Product range with PC, PMMA or CHEMO diffuser:

T26 1-/2-lamp 18 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 684 mm
T26 1-/2-lamp 36 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 1,294 mm
T26 1-/2-lamp 58 W electr. ballast, low-loss ballast; 1,594 mm
T16 1-/2-lamp 28/35/49 W; 1,294 mm/1,594 mm
T16 1-lamp 54/80 W; 1,294 mm/1,594 mm
Special designs (available emergency lighting, heavy-

upon request): SCII, high- duty electronic ballast, plastic
temperature, low-temperature, catches, halogen-free wiring
Properties of diffuser materials:
Polycarbonate (PC) CHEMO
– UV-stabilised – extremely UV-resistant,
– extremely impact-resistant comparable to PMMA
– chemically resistant, to a – substantial resistance to a
limited extent large number of chemicals
Polymethylmethacrylate – impact resistance similar
(PMMA) to PC
– 100 % UV-resistant
– good chemical resistance
– impact absorbing
UV-resistance Yellowness Index
30
25
20
15
10
5
PC with UV-stabiliser
PMMA and CHEMO 0
Weathering time 60 80 100 120
(months)
Heavy-duty electronic ballasts

The PC industry product range T16 and T26 models ensure a
was specially designed for use in long service life, even under
harsh industrial environments. All tough environmental conditions.
Comparison of service life of a PC industry ballast compared with a

standard electronic ballast, taking the SCUBA luminaire as an example
Reliability
SCUBA SCUBA with SCUBA with
+ standard PC industry: PC industry:
electronic ballast same service double service
life at higher life at the same 90 %
temperature temperature
95 %
100 %
0 10,000 20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000 60,000 70,000 80,000 90,000 100,000 service life (h)
Standard electronic ballast PC industry PC industry

1/58 W, at 38 °C max. 1/58 W, at 50 °C max. 1/58 W, at 38 °C max.

Measured values refer to ambient temperature, without through-wiring.

Subtract 7 °C in case of through-wiring.
CLEAN – Three-level luminaire concept for
clean-rooms
CLEAN – an overview
Model Designs Installation Protection type
Square Linear type Usable space Ceiling
CLEAN Surface-
• mounted IP 65 IP 65
Supreme
CLEAN
• • Recessed IP 65 IP 54
Advanced
CLEAN
• • Recessed IP 54 IP 20
Classic
All luminaires boast a high- disinfectants, and have been

quality surface finish resist- given the ENEC mark for their
ant to cleaning agents and rugged, durable design.
Application:
In healthcare settings In industry and engineering
– operating theatres – electronics
– laboratories – electrical engineering
– air locks – micromechanics
– intensive care units – biogenetics
– emergency wards – pharmaceutical and chemical
– examination and treatment companies
rooms – laboratory technology
– recovery rooms – genetic engineering
– hallway and corridor areas – food technology
– administrative areas – extremely critical areas of
– laundries and kitchens food production
– doctors’ surgeries – food industry
– healthcare and rehabilitation – hallway and corridor areas
centres – laundries and large-scale
catering establishments
CLEAN Supreme
– IPA certificate for clean-room
compatibility in clean-rooms
in Classes 3 to 9 (ISO), issued
by the Fraunhofer Institute
– antistatic surface finish
– frameless, continuous glass
diffuser
– trouble-free operation in rooms
with positive and negative
pressure containment systems
thanks to special valve system
– easy installation of luminaires,
convenient relamping
CLEAN Advanced
– IPA certificate for clean-room
compatibility in clean-rooms in
Classes 3 to 9 (ISO), issued by
the Fraunhofer Institute
– cover made of anodised alu-
minium
– models with toughened safety
glass or shatter-proof PMMA
acrylic glass
– trouble-free operation in rooms
with positive and negative pres-
sure containment systems
thanks to special valve system – extremely resistant materials
– easy installation of luminaires, and high-quality workman-
convenient relamping ship
CLEAN Classic
– cover made of anodised alu-
minium
– model with PMMA acrylic glass
– extremely resistant materials
and high-quality workmanship
ZBOX – Plug&Play
Lighting control system for hotels, private
dwellings and shops
Plug&Play
– pre-addressed and pre-pro-
grammed for hotel rooms
– plug-in connections
– locally as stand-alone
system, or networked with
Luxmate bus
ZBOX-Controller: ZBOX-Cxx:
– web tool for fine adjustment
W: 372 mm W: 86 mm
– no licence, no special skills H: 372 mm H: 86 mm
required, no experts needed D: 60 mm D 11 mm
– direct connection via
Ethernet (TCP/IP)
– transparency of costs from
design through to operation
– can be upgraded using
standard Luxmate bus com-
ponents
– 4 control points included
– no addressing of luminaires,
except for RGBW (DALI
Broadcast)
Intuitive:
– clear design layout and – control concept completely
functions of control units focused on guest
– self-explanatory symbols – “ZBOX does what guests expect”
Emotion:
– lighting scenes – day and night scenes (net-
– dynamism and controlled worked with Luxmate add-on
colour changes module: radio-controlled clock)
Safety:
– emergency lighting can be – “crash channel” provides
integrated light if controller fails
– ZUMTOBEL ONLITE separate – quick and easy replacement,
battery luminaires – preferably no special skills required
NT3 versions with central moni- – dimmer with autoprotect

toring in case of networking facility (overload protection
for lighting loads)
Main functions: Pros:
– scenes and individual – energy savings – through
adjustment lighting scenes at reduced
– special control concept lighting levels cost
– functions adjustable via savings
ZBOX.WEBTOOL – operating costs – dimming
– mains cut-off device increases service life of
– backup function with SD incandescent lamps
card (under development) longer maintenance cycles
– ZBOX.NIGHTLOGIC cost savings
day/night scenes (various – fast – thanks to pre-address-
scenes are called up ing and plug-in connectors
depending on the time – do it yourself using the
of day) ZBOX.WEBTOOL
– package optimised for work-
flow on site
Technical data:
– 8 x output (300 W) – switch- – 5 x input for DALI ZBOX
able via relay – dimmable Circle control unit – multiple
via DALI Broadcast (all elec- allocation (e.g. 1 x left bed +
tronic ballasts connected 1 x right bed + 2 x room +
are dimmed simultaneously; 2 x bathroom + 2 x hall)
no DALI addressing; max. – 2 x input “Key Card” and
of 10 DALI loads) – slot for “Aux” – 230 V-AC, potential-
300 VA universal dimmer free
(20–300 VA; 0 ... 100 %) – 1 x Luxmate bus connection
– 1 x output (300 W) for (1 bus load)
RGBW control of wellness – 1 x RJ45 Ethernet LAN
luminaire (DALI group num- connection for web tool and
bers 1– 4; max. 16 DALI service
loads) – 1 x SD card for backup/
– 1 x output for 1 blinds/ restore (under development)
curtain motor 230 V-AC
Energy loss:
– ZBOX Controller: light on – ZBOX DIMMER300: light
10 W (no dimmer), light on 0.7 W
off 1 W (stand-alone = full
standby) 4.5 W (networked
= half standby)
ONLITE escape sign and emergency luminaires
– Combining design and functionality
All ONLITE escape sign An attractive design and the
luminaires are based on use of high-quality materials
first-class lighting technology. guarantee not only maximum
This ensures that pictograms functionality and reliability,
are uniformly illuminated at a but also pleasant, unobtrusive
minimum luminance level of integration with the interior
200 cd/m2. design.
Each ONLITE escape sign can NSI

be supplied via three different Supplied via LPS system
systems. The respective type (communication via Power
of supply is indicated by the Line)
luminaire’s name:
DALI
NT 1/3 Supplied via CPS system
Separate battery supply with (communication via DALI)
auto test and control test func-
tion (1 and 3 h stand-alone
time)
NT 1/3 auto test

230 V AC – no DALI bus connected
– fixed test cycle programmes
are run automatically, dis-
played via bicoloured LED
– low installation effort
230 V AC NT 1/3 control test

DALI bus connected: lumi-
naires centrally monitored
– individual configuration/
monitoring of luminaires
DALI control line – minimum testing effort
SB 128
Controller – fully automatic test log book
– max. functional reliability
NSI – supply via LPS
Communication with lumi-
naires with PLC (power line
control) via supply line. All
luminaires can be individually
controlled and monitored.
– maximum intrinsic safety
thanks to self-contained
systems
– easy maintenance
– low installation effort
– reduced fire load
– can be fully integrated into
lighting management system
DALI – supplied via CPS

Supply via CPS, diesel genera-
tor or 2nd mains. Monitored via
DALI interface.
– every DALI luminaire can
be used as an emergency
luminaire
– minimum maintenance effort
– interference-free data com-
munication
– no installation of additional
monitoring modules in lumi-
naires required
– security function of final
circuit (makes sure that
luminaires can be switched
on reliably if communication
line is defective)
Design by
Matteo Thun with Lutz Büsing
ONLITE RESCLITE – A world champion in terms
of lighting technology and energy efficiency
With a Power LED and – Minimum design effort.
three sophisticated optics, Completely independent
RESCLITE paves the way from general lighting. The
to a new era of emergency only design work needed
lighting. is the placing of spacing
– Ideal light distribution thanks tables.
to optimum illumination. – Extremely easy to install and
Only a very small number maintain. Standard installa-
of luminaires are required tion terminals for through-
for emergency lighting in wiring up to 2.5 mm². Strain
conformity with relevant relief devices and covers
standards. fixed without tools ensure
– Minimum energy consump- quick, straightforward instal-
tion and maximum installed lation.
load of 5 W. Power input
in non-maintained mode
approx. 1.5 W. This means
that only very small-scale
supply and cable systems
are needed.
Mounting options
Recessed into ceiling
Surface-mounted on ceiling
TECTON continuous-row
lighting system
RESCLITE escape
LED emergency luminaire for
escape route lighting accord-
ing to EN 1838
Mounting height Max. spacing (m) Max. spacing (m)

in m wall/luminaire luminaire/luminaire
h a1 b1 a2 b2
2.2 5.9 5.7 13.4 12.9
2.5 6.4 6.1 14.6 14.0
3.0 7.1 6.7 16.4 15.7
4.0 8.1 7.4 19.5 18.5
5.0 7.5 2.3 22.0 19.9
a2 a1
h
b2 b1
a Emergency power supply via separate battery for 1 hour (NT1) and
central battery (NSI, DALI)
b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3))
– Width of escape route: 2 m – Reflection factors: 0

– Minimum illuminance across – Complies with glare reduction
width 1 m: 1 lx acc. to EN 1838
– Uniformity higher than 40 : 1
– Maintenance factor consid-
ered: 0.8
RESCLITE anti-panic
LED emergency luminaire
for anti-panic lighting
according to EN 1838
Mounting height Max. spacing (m) Max. spacing (m)

in m wall/luminaire luminaire/luminaire
h a1 b1 a2 b2
2.2 3.4 3.1 9.3 8.9
2.5 3.5 3.1 10.1 9.5
3.0 3.2 2.6 11.1 10.5
4.0 1.5 0.9 12.9 11.6
5.0 0.9 0.7 12.4 10.4
– rotationally symmetrical – Reflection factors: 0

distribution – Complies with glare reduc-
– minimum illuminance: 0.5 lx tion acc. to EN 1838
– Uniformity higher than 40 : 1
– maintenance factor consid-
ered: 0,8
h a2 a1
b2 b1
a1
b1
a2
b2
a2 a1
b2 b1
via central battery (NSI, DALI)
b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)
RESCLITE spot
LED emergency luminaire
for increased illuminance levels
acc. to EN 1838
Min. illuminance level of Mounting Ø of light cone

5 lx s for first-aid, fire-fight- height in m in m
ing and reporting facilities: h Øa Øb
2.5 2.4 2.1
3.0 2.7 2.3
4.0 3.0 2.7
5.0 2.8 –
– rotationally symmetrical distri- – reflection factors: 0

bution – complies with glare reduc-
– minimum illuminance: 5 lx tion acc. to EN 1838
– maintenance factor consid-
ered: 0,8
h Ø a, b
Ø a, b
via central battery (NSI, DALI)
b Emergency power supply via separate battery for 3 hours (NT3)
Surface-
Type Light Protection Protection Recognition mounted Pendant- Cord Wall- 90° wall- Recessed TECTON
source type class range on ceiling mounted suspension mounted mounted
RESCLITE LED IP 40
84 / Chapter 3
cVs
ARTSIGN LED IP 20 15 m 3)
cs
ONLITE LOOK product overview
ERGOSIGN T16 8 W IP 40 15 m 3)
410 Lm
cs 7.6 m 5)
PROOFSIGN LED IP 65 1) 20 m 3)
cs
LED
COMSIGN T16 8 W IP 20 28 m 3)
cs
410 Lm 15 m 4)

COMSIGN II LED IP 20 cs 28 m 3)
15 m 4)
PURESIGN LED IP 40 cs 30 m 3)
15 m 4)
3)
ECOSIGN T16 8 W IP 65 1) 32 m
410 Lm
wcs 16 m 4)
2)
ECOSIGN T16 8 W IP 65 1)
wcs
safety 410 Lm
2) 2)
1) with cable feed only 4) lt. VkF and SN EN 1838

CUBESIGN TC-DEL IP 40 90 m 3) 2) reduced to IP 40 (model for CH)
1/26 W
cs 45 m 4) 3) acc. to EN 1838 and 5) narrow side if mounted on
DIN 4844 the ceiling
Chapter 3 / 85
BELIA – Single-bed luminaire
Living-room ambience for medically used rooms
As a single-bed luminaire that
can optionally be fitted with
supply modules, BELIA provides
precise examination lighting for
care personnel and glare-free
reading light for patients, giv-
ing them a feeling of privacy.
Multifunctional types of lighting
and innovative longitudinal glare
control provide ample evidence
of BELIA’s efficiency and photo-
metric qualities.
Design by
NPK Industrial Design
Application:
– medically used rooms with- – rehabilitation centres and
out high supply require- nursing homes
ments – homes for the elderly
Designs:
– single-bed luminaire with – optional connection to
580 mm mounting chan- medical supply systems, if
nel for flush integration of medical gases are needed,
safety sockets, call system, for instance.
telecommunication and
data sockets
One luminaire – four lighting scenes:
Room lighting Examination lighting
Reading light Night lighting

100
L (reading light + room lighting):

1090 mm, 1390 mm
L (plus night lighting): 188

1200 mm, 1500 mm
TETTOIA – Medical supply unit
Flexibility in a pleasantly smooth design
TETTOIA boasts plenty of scope

for action. Thanks to three
independent lighting elements,
the direct/indirect luminaire pro-
vides perfect light for any situ-
ation – at the press of a button
and featuring convenient reset
mechanisms. This means that
both patient and doctor are pro-
vided with perfect convenience.
Colours for the basic unit and
lighting dormer can be chosen
personally, the supply compo-
nents are flexibly integrated.
Design by
NPK Industrial Design
Application:
– medically used rooms wit – nursing rooms
high supply requirements
– patient rooms
Modular systems:
– supply unit boasts flexibility – optional supply of mains-
in terms of both design and power components,
technology communication and data
– built-in lighting unit for sockets, medical gases
general, reading, examina-
tion and night lighting
162
128

32
60
228
One luminaire – four lighting scenes:
Room lighting Examination lighting
Reading light Night lighting
Prismatic diffuser for glare-free

room lighting, easy-to-clean
closed designs.
Freedom of choice for colours of

basic unit and lighting dormer.
Supply components can be

installed on the front and also
on the underside.
Chapter 4
Lamps and ballasts
Lamp selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Lamp characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–4
The main lamp types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 – 10
Application notes, T16 fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 11 – 14
A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26 . . . . . . . 15
Application notes, compact fluorescent lamps . . . . . . . 16 – 17
Application notes, metal halide lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 + 400 W . . . 19 – 20
Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 – 23
Characteristic values of the major lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 24 – 28
Energy efficiency of luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overview of electronic ballasts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power consumption, energy savings, required power . . 31
Overview of LED control gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 – 36
Choosing the right lamp –
An important first decision
Choosing the right lamp depends on what is required of the
lighting (see Chapter 2).
For instance, incandescent lamps are still the most popular

lighting option used in domestic areas to help create that cosy
atmosphere. However, these lamps generate only little light,
apart from having a short service life. Therefore, despite their
low purchase price, energy-efficient and environmentally com-
patible alternatives must be used increasingly in the future.
In other situations, users happily tolerate the higher purchase

price of discharge lamps because their high luminous efficiency
and long lifetime make them economic.
Thus it is part of the expertise of the lighting designer to find

the most suitable lamp for a lighting task.
Lamp characteristics can essentially be specified by the

following key terms:
Luminous Service Light Colour

flux/
efficiency life colour rendition
Drop in Lamp Burning

luminous character- position
flux istics
Lamp Warm-up Re-start Dimming

power time time capability
Lamp characteristics
1. Power
The electrical power consumption of the lamp as opposed to the
power consumption of a system comprising lamp and ballast.
2. Luminous flux/luminous efficiency

The luminous flux specifies the total amount of light generated by
a lamp. The rated luminous flux is measured at a standardised
measurement temperature of 25 °C in units of lumen [lm]. The
ratio of luminous flux to electrical power consumption gives the
luminous efficiency [lm/W]. The system luminous efficiency also
includes the power consumption of the ballast.
3. Service life
The average service life is normally specified, being the time by
which statistically half the lamps are still working (mortality), or
half the lamps have failed. This test is subject to standardised
operating conditions. Lamp manufacturers display this failure
rate by curves. In Chapter 8, they are shown as maintenance
factors (LSF).
4. Drop in luminous flux

The initial luminous flux of a new lamp decreases over its time of
operation (lumen maintenance), due to the ageing of its chemi-
cal and physical components. Lamp manufacturers display this
drop in luminous flux by curves. In Chapter 8, they are shown as
maintenance factors (LLWF).
5. Light colour
The light colour describes the colour impression made by a white
light source as relatively warm (ww = warm) or relatively cool
(nw = intermediate, tw = cool). It is affected by the red and blue
colour components in the spectrum.
6. Colour rendition
The spectral components of the light determine how well various
object colours can be reproduced. The higher the colour rendition
index (Ra or CRI), or the lower the colour rendition group number,
the better the colour rendition in comparison with the optimum
reference light.
Chapter 4 / 3
7. Warm-up time
Discharge lamps in particular need between 30 seconds and
several minutes to warm up and output the full luminous flux.
8. Re-start
High-pressure discharge lamps need to cool down for several
minutes before they can be started again.
9. Dimming capability
Besides incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps, nowa-
days all fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can also be
dimmed over almost any range. Metal halide lamps, however, are
still not approved by the manufacturers for dimming, because
this may have uncontrollable effects on light quality and lamp
service life. The new series of special models for indoor and
outdoor applications constitute an exception. The power of high-
pressure sodium- and mercury-vapour lamps can be varied, but
only in discrete levels.
10. Burning position

Manufacturers specify the permitted burning positions for their
lamps. For some metal halide lamps, only certain burning posi-
tions are allowed so as to avoid unstable operating states.
Compact fluorescent lamps may usually be used in any burning
position; however, important properties such as the luminous
flux vs. temperature curve may vary with the position.
4 / Chapter 4
The main lamp types
QR-CBC QT12 QR111

l a m p s
H a l o g e n
QT32 QT-DE QPAR51 QPAR64
Halogen lamps
– For mains and low-voltage – Brilliant light
operation – Excellent colour rendition
– Longer service life and – Applications: retail
higher luminous efficiency and domestic areas,
than incandescent lamps restaurants and
– Easy to dim catering
How they work Current flows through a filament and

heats it up, just as in incandescent lamps. These lamps
therefore generate a relatively large amount of heat. The
halogen cycle increases the efficiency and extends the
service life compared with traditional incandescent lamps.
Low-voltage types are very small and are ideal for precise
direction of light, but do require a transformer.
Chapter 4 / 5
l a m p s
T16/T26 T16-R T16-R

Fluorescent lamps
– High to very high – Long service life
F l u o re s c e n t
luminous efficiency – Extensive range of types

(in particular T16 HE) – Dimmable
– Good to excellent – Application: economi-
colour rendition cally efficient wide-
area lighting
How they work An alternating electric field generates
invisible UV radiation between the two electrodes in the
discharge tube. This radiation is converted into high-quality
visible light in the fluorescent material. The lamps need a
starting aid and a current limiting device, usually combined
in an electronic ballast. The luminous flux is highly depend-
ent on the ambient temperature.
l a m p s
f l u o re s c e n t
TC-DEL TC-TEL(I) TC-TEL(I) TC-L
Compact fluorescent lamps

– Compact designs – Applications: commer-
– High luminous efficiency cial and high-profile
– Excellent colour rendition interiors, restaurants
C o m p a c t
– Extensive range of types and catering

– Dimmable
How they work These lamps are compact versions of the
linear or circular fluorescent lamps, and operate in a very

similar way. The luminous flux depends on the burning
position and temperature.
6 / Chapter 4
lamps
HIT-TC-CE HIT-CE HIT-DE-CE HIT-DE HIE HIT
Metal halide lamps

– High luminous efficiency
halide
– Cannot be dimmed
– Good to excellent colour – Applications: industrial
rendition bays, spotlighting,
– High colour stability for
Metal
ceramic discharge-tube floodlighting, retail

lamps areas
How they work In metal halide lamps, a highly compact

electric arc is produced in a discharge tube. The com-
position of the materials in the tube determines the light
quality.
A starter is needed to switch on the lamp, and the current

must be limited by a ballast. Practical electronic ballasts
are also available for low-power lamps.
Chapter 4 / 7
Sodium vapour lamps
– High luminous
efficiency and long
service life
– Satisfactory to poor
colour rendition
– Can be dimmed in
discrete steps
l a m p s
– Applications: indus-
trial bays, street
lighting
va p o u r
HST-CRI HSE HST
Colour-improved
(Philips SDW):
S o d i u m
– Excellent colour rendition – Long service life

– Warm light – Application: retail areas
How they work The discharge in the linearly extended

ceramic discharge tube is defined by sodium, so the light
is yellowish and only suitable for special applications.
The colour-improved SDW lamp by Philips is a popular
choice for lighting retail areas. A starter is usually needed
to switch on the lamp, and the current must be limited by
a ballast.
Mercury vapour lamps

– No starter, just ballast
required
– Satisfactory to poor
colour rendition
Mercury vapour lamps
– Can be dimmed in
discrete steps
– Applications: indus-
trial bays, street
lighting
HME
How they work The high-pressure mercury vapour lamp

is actually the forerunner to the modern metal halide lamp,
although it provides a far poorer light quality. The lamps
can be started at mains voltage, and so only need a ballast
for current limiting.
8 / Chapter 4
LMG-IHf
QL
– By Philips only – Applications: areas
– 55 W, 85 W and 165 W where it is difficult
l a m p s
– Excellent colour rendition to replace lamps;

– Very long service life commercial and
– Rotationally symmetrical light
industrial interiors,
I n d u c t i o n
distribution
retail, indoor and
outdoor public areas
How they work A high-frequency electromagnetic field

is coupled into the glass bulb via an antenna protruding
into the bulb. This produces UV radiation which is then con-
verted into visible light by fluorescent material, just as
in fluorescent lamps.
The amalgam technology used in these lamps makes their

luminous flux only very slightly temperature-dependent.
The lamps can only be operated using special electronic
ballasts by Philips. Systems have a very long service life
because the only parts subject to wear are in these bal-
lasts. As yet there are no dimmable electronic ballasts
available.
Chapter 4 / 9
Wire bond Bubble
LED chip
Board
LED (EOS P214 by TRIDONIC.ATCO)

Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
– Each manufacturer uses own – Applications: deco-
technology rative indoor and
– Highly efficient direct genera- outdoor applica-
tion of coloured light tions, escape sign
( L E D s )
– Huge potential as the light luminaires, visual

source of the future guidance systems,
innovative lighting
d i o d e s
solutions, backlight-
ing of advertising
signs, showcase
e m i t t i n g
and shelf lighting
How they work Light emitting diodes are modern semi-

conductor devices. Their properties are determined by
L i g h t
the materials used as well as the mechanical design. The

active semiconductor layer, in which radiation is produced,
is sandwiched between a positive and a negative substrate.
Depending on the materials used, a large variety of differ-
ent colours are produced directly. White light can only be
produced using fluorescent materials from blue LEDs or by
mixing RGB. Today, the smallest chips have a side length
of approx. 250 μm (1 micrometre = 1 one-thousandth of
a millimetre). LED modules are supplied with power via
appropriate converters with safety extra-low voltage. They
can be dimmed easily. The LEDs’ very long service life of
several 10,000 hours can only be achieved when over-
heating is avoided (thermal management).
Rapid increases in efficiency at a simultaneous fall in

prices open up bright perspectives for the future.
10 / Chapter 4
Application notes
T16 fluorescent lamps
In comparison with thicker T26 lamps (diameter: 26 mm), mod-

ern T16 lamps (diameter: 16 mm) show several different proper-
ties that must be taken into account for application.
1. Luminous flux – temperature curve

As for all fluorescent lamps, the lamp’s luminous flux is
temperature-dependent. The maximum value is obtained at an
optimum ambient temperature, with losses increasing at higher
and lower temperatures. The T16 basically follows the same
curve as the T26, but the maximum occurs not at an ambient
temperature of 20 to 25 °C but at about 35 °C.
Reason: The cool spot of T16 is not located in the centre of the
lamp, but typically at one end of the tube where the manufac-
turer has fixed its seal.
The rated luminous flux is generally specified for an ambient
temperature of 25 °C. For the T16, the maximum value therefore
lies above this rated value. Thus luminaire efficiencies may have
levels greater than “1”.
100
80
T26 58 W
60 T16
40
T26 36 W
20
-20 0 20 40 60 80 °C
Ambient temperature
Chapter 4 / 11
2. CSO – Cool Spot Optimizer
The photometric data of luminaires typically apply to a standard
temperature of 25 °C. Where a different ambient temperature
prevails, the lamps’ luminous flux is also affected. In fluorescent
lamps, the luminous flux declines in particular at lower tem-
peratures. In order to increase the efficiency of luminaires fitted
with T16 lamps, the so-called Cool Spot Optimizer (CSO) may
be used.
The CSO effects a tempera-

ture increase at the lamp by
approx. 10 to 20 degrees,
resulting in a corresponding
shift to the left of the T16
curve displayed (page 11).
Example: FZ 1/54 without CSO at 0 °C LB approx. 60 %

FZ 1/54 with CSO at 0 °C LB approx. 90 %
In the above example, the luminous flux produced is therefore

increased by 50 % and the number of luminaires required is
reduced by one third, owing to the CSO.
For lighting design purposes, an appropriately adjusted planned
luminous flux has to be calculated. The CSO may only be used
in conventional T16 28/54 W and/or 35/49/80 W lamps using
cold-spot technology, and must be fitted at the lamp end (see
picture).
12 / Chapter 4
3. Ageing/burning in
Brand new lamps stabilise during the ageing phase. This is the
period immediately after the lamps are switched on for the first
time, when the initially encapsulated mercury is vaporised and
evenly distributed in the lamp. To ensure perfect operation, one
should allow a period of 2 to 4 days of operation without dimming
or switching, particularly in dimming installations. Unstabilised
lamps may differ in brightness and light colour, even exhibiting
flickering at low dimming levels. This may have a negative impact
on the lamp service life.
Also, before assessing a lighting installation’s illuminance level

and lighting quality using already aged lamps, these should be
burnt in over a minimum period of 30–60 minutes without dim-
ming or switching them.
4. Lamp orientation
Owing to the two electrodes (tube ends) not being identical
in design, it matters how one or more lamps are fitted in the
luminaires. In general, lamp ends should always have the same
orientation i.e. in multi-lamp luminaires they should lie next to
each other, and where lamps are positioned vertically, they
should preferably also be at the bottom. For cool environments,
it may make sense – depending on the type of luminaire – to
arrange the lamp/s differently.
single-lamp multi-lamp
normal
ambient
temperature
cool
ambient
temperature
Chapter 4 / 13
Further details for TETRIS and continuous row
arrangements:
Particular attention is needed for special lamp arrangements
like in TETRIS (TECTON or SLOT luminaires) or in continous-row
lighting systems.
The so-called TETRIS arrangement provides for lamps overlap-

ping several centimetres. This enables to compensate for the
dark zone at the lamp’s ends. In order to provide for maximum
uniformity, it is recommended to also align all lamps identically.
The last lamp/s, however, should be turned so as to make the
lamp end head towards the centre of the luminaire.
single-lamp twin-lamp
In a continous-row lighting
system, the maximum total
luminous flux will be achieved
if the lamp ends are placed
next to each other, if possible.
For cool environments, here
too it may make sense to
arrange the lamp/s differently.
single- and twin-lamp single- and twin-lamp
14 / Chapter 4
A comparison of fluorescent lamps – T16/T26
Advantages of T16 fluorescent lamps
– Reduction in the lamp diameter by about 40 %
– Higher optical efficiencies possible
– Improved luminous efficiency
– Improved luminaire efficiencies from the shift in the
luminous-flux peak
– Standardised luminance levels for all lamp lengths for
high-efficiency lamps
– Larger range of types makes it easier to meet lighting
requirements more closely
Summary type comparison (selection):

T16 T26
Length Power Rated luminous Length Power Rated luminous
flux (25 °C) flux (25 °C)
549 mm 14 W 1200 lm 590 mm 18 W 1350 lm
24 W 1750 lm
849 mm 21 W 1900 lm 895 mm 30 W 2350 lm
39 W 3100 lm
1149 mm 28 W 2600 lm 1200 mm 36 W 3350 lm
54 W 4450 lm
1449 mm 35 W 3300 lm 1500 mm 58 W 5200 lm
49 W 4300 lm
80 W 6150 lm
Example of interior lighting using T16 and T26

Room dimensions: length = 8 m, width = 6 m, height = 3 m
Reflection factors: ceiling = 70 %, walls = 50 %, floor = 20 %
Required maintenance value of illuminance: 500 lx
Option 1: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/36 W electr. ballast
Option 2: SPHEROS ind/direct luminaire, matt louvre, 2/28 W electr. ballast
Option 1 Option 2
2/36 W 2/28 W
Number of luminaires 8 8
Max. lamp luminous efficiency 93 lm/W 104 lm/W
Power consumption per m2 per 100 lx 2.2 W/m2/100 lx 2.0 W/m2/100 lx
Luminaire efficiency 85 % 91 %
Utilization factor 66 % 73 %
Energy saving 10 %
Chapter 4 / 15
Application notes Compact fluorescent lamps
1. Amalgam lamps
The strong temperature dependence of the luminous flux of
traditional fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps can be
compensated by adding amalgam (mercury compound).
This helps to somewhat mitigate the sharp drop at higher or
lower temperatures, ensuring that more than 90 % of the
maximum luminous flux is achieved over a wide temperature
range of approx. +5 to +70 °C. Above and below this range,
however, the light level still falls off sharply. The tables provide
an overview of those major manufacturers’ lamps in the TC-T
design (three-fold double tube) that have added amalgam.
without amalgam TC-T, TC-TE Other amalgam
models can be
13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W
found in the
Osram 2-pin
DULUX T • • • T16 and TC-L
Osram 4-pin
DULUX T/E • • • • • designs.
Philips 2-pin
PL-T 2p • • •
Philips 4-pin
PL-T 4p • • • • • •
GE 2-pin
BIAX T • • •
Sylvania 2-pin
Lynx CF-T • •
with amalgam TC-TI, TC-TELI, TC-QELI

13 W 18 W 26 W 32 W 42 W 57 W 60 W 70 W 85 W 120 W
Osram
2-pin
DULUX T IN • •
Osram
4-pin
DULUX T/E IN • • • • • •
DULUX HO CONSTANT •
Philips
2-pin
PL-T TOP 2p • •
Philips
4-pin
PL-T TOP 4p • • • • •
PL-H • • •
GE
4-pin
BIAX T/E • • • •
BIAX Q/E • • •
Sylvania
4-pin
Lynx CF-TE • • • •
16 / Chapter 4
2. Lamp orientation
The luminous flux from compact fluorescent lamps is highly
dependent on the burning position. Luminaire efficiency can be
maximised by fitting the lamps properly in the luminaires.
Standard types have a cool spot in the exposed lamp bend, so
that self-heating and convection may lead to a temperature rise
here. In amalgam lamps, the cool spot lies in the lamp base.
In compact luminaires with horizontal lamp arrangement
(e.g. downlights), it is therefore recommended to fit the lamps
with electrodes uppermost wherever possible. Since the lamp
end does not allow consistent identification of the electrode
position, that lamp side on which adjacent tubes are not con-
nected should be placed uppermost – these are the two tube
ends containing the internal electrodes. The exception to this is
the PHILIPS PL-T, in which the electrodes are arranged diago-
nally. Either possible orientation of these lamps is equivalent.
Chapter 4 / 17
Application notes
Metal halide lamps
1. Ballasts
The manufacturers of metal halide lamps use a range of operat-
ing principles, resulting in different electrical operating values.
Some lamps are therefore approved for operation both with
ballasts for metal halide lamps (e.g. COPA I 1/400 HIE) and with
ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour lamps (e.g. COPA I
1/400 HSE). The higher operating current then leads to higher
luminous flux levels for the same lamps together with a slightly
altered light quality. In both cases suitable starters are required.
2. Glass covers
In general, metal halide lamps require a glass cover to protect
people and property in the event of the lamp exploding. It is
the manufacturer’s responsibility to decide whether to permit
individual lamp types to be used in uncovered luminaires.
Suitable safety devices are installed in the lamps for this purpose
(e.g. integral safety tube, outer protective coating). The detailed
information from the manufacturer must be observed without fail.
3. Service life characteristics

The average lamp service life (lamp survival factor) and the reduc-
tion in luminous flux (lamp luminous flux maintenance factor)
can vary markedly in some of the different lamp types. They also
depend on the switching frequency and the position of use. Once
again the detailed data from the manufacturer must be taken into
account. The maintenance factor tables in Chapter 8 contain some
typical values.
With these high-pressure discharge lamps in particular, it is

important to replace the lamps at the designated end of their
service life (maintenance interval) at the latest. Continued use
may lead to damage of lamps and control gear and consequently
of luminaires!
18 / Chapter 4
OSRAM PHILIPS
HQI-E HQI-E/P HQI-T HCI-E HCI-T HCI-TM HPI-PLUS HPI-Plus HPI-T PLUS
POWERBALL POWERBALL POWERBALL 745/767 BU 745/767 BU-P 645
250 W/D 250 W/D 250 W/D 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W/WDL 250 W 250 W 250 W
Design Ellipsoid Ellipsoid Tube Ellipsoid Tube Tube mini Ellipsoid Ellipsoid Tube
Base E 40 E 40 E 40 E 40 E 40 G 22 E 40 E40 E 40
Burning position any any any any any any pendant ±15° pendant ±15° pendant ±20°
Approved for operation no yes no no no no no yes no
in uncovered luminaires
Average service life 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 6,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h
Reduction in lumin, flux See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency”
Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI)
Luminous flux not permitted not permitted not permitted not permitted not permitted not permitted 18,000 lm 18,000 lm 20,500 lm
Colour temperature 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K
Colour rendition 70 70 65
index Ra
Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS)
Luminous flux 19,000 lm 17,000 lm 20,000 lm 24,100 lm 25,800 lm 24,500 lm 25,500 lm 25,500 lm 25,000 lm
Colour temperature 5,200 K 5,200 K 5,300 K 3,000 K 3,000 K 3,000 K 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K
Colour rendition 90 90 90 88 89 90 70 70 65
Characteristics of metal halide lamps 250 W
index Ra
Chapter 4 / 19
All data subject to change. For reliable information and data on other lamp types, please refer to the manufacturer’s data.
OSRAM PHILIPS
HQI-E HQI-E/P HQI-E HQI-BT HQI-T HPI PLUS HPI PLUS HPI PLUS HPI-T PLUS
400 W/D 400 W/D 400 W/N 400 W/D 400 W/N 400 W 400 W 400 W 400 W
(clear) 745/767 743 745/767 645
20 / Chapter 4
BU HOR BU-P
Design Ellipsoid Ellipsoid Ellipsoid Tube Tube Ellipsoid Ellipsoid Ellipsoid Tube
Base E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40 E40
Burning position any any any any horizontal ±45° pendant ±15° horizontal ±20° pendant ±15° horizontal ±20°
Approved for operation in no yes no no no no no yes no
uncovered luminaires
Average service life 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 12,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h 20,000 h
Reduction in luminous flux See maintenance factors in Chapter 8 “Calculation of economic efficiency”
Operation with metal-halide lamp ballast (HI)
Colour temperature 5,800 K 5,000 K 4,700 K 6,100 K 4,100 K 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,300 K 4,500 K/6,700 K 4,500 K
Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 58 90 >60 70 70 70 65
Operation with high-pressure sodium-vapour lamp ballast (HS)
Colour temperature 5,900 K 4,500 K 4,100 K 5,200 K 3,800 K 4,000 K/5,400 K 3,800 K 4,000 K/5,400 K 4,000 K
Characteristics of metal halide lamps 400 W
Colour rendition index Ra 90 90 64 90 >65 70 70 70 65

All data subject to change. For reliable information and data on other lamp types, please refer to the manufacturer’s data.
LBS code Description System power Osram Philips GE Sylvania

Fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps
T16 /840 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm light colour 840 14–80 W FH /840 HE; MASTER TL5 HE/HO Starcoat T5 T5 Luxline Plus
FQ /840 HO Super 80/840 F/T5/840 FHE/840, FHO/840
T16-I /830 Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm amalgam techn. 24–120 W FQ /830 HO MASTER TL5 HO/VHO --- ---
light colour 830 CONSTANT TOP /830
T16-bu Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm blau 14–80 W FH /67 HE; TL5 HO Coloured --- ---
FQ /67 HO Pro
T16-R(I) Fluorescent lamp Ø 16 mm circular 22–60 W FC MASTER TL5C --- ---
(partly amalgam techn.)
T26 /830 Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm light colour 830 15–58 W L /830 MASTER TL-D Super T8 Polylux T8 Luxline Plus
80 /830 XLR F /830 F /830
T26-LL Fluorescent lamp Ø 26 mm long service life 15–58 W --- MASTER TL-D --- ---
Xtra/Xtreme
TC-TSE Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) 5–30 W DULUX EL E27 MASTER PL Electronic Biax Mini-Lynx T /E27
with integral electr. ballast E27" screw-in cap Electronic
TC-S Compact fluorescent lamp (1 short double tube) 5–11 W DULUX S MASTER PL-S 2 Pin Biax S - 2 pin Lynx-S
Lamp descriptions acc. to LBS (ZVEI) –
only for conventional/low-loss ballast

TC-DEL Compact fluorescent lamp (2 double tubes) 10–26 W DULUX D/E MASTER PL-C 4 Pin Biax D/E - 4 Pin Lynx-DE
G24q 4-pin cap for conv./low-loss/electr. ballasts
TC-TELI Compact fluorescent lamp (3 double tubes) 13–70 W DULUX T/E IN MASTER PL-T TOP Biax T/E - 4 Pin Lynx-TE
amalgam techn. GX24q 4-pin cap 4 Pin
TC-L Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 18–80 W DULUX L MASTER PL-L 4 Pin Biax L - 4 pin Lynx-LE
a comparison of models and manufacturers’ descriptions
2G11 4-pin cap

TC-LI Compact fluorescent lamp (1 long double tube) 40–80 W DULUX L --- --- ---
42G11 4-pin cap amalgam techn. CONSTANT
Chapter 4 / 21
Induction lamps
LMG-IHf Ball-shaped induction lamp 55–165 W --- MASTER QL --- ---
LMG-SIHf Double-tube induction lamp 70–150 W ENDURA --- --- ---
Incandescent and halogen incandescent lamps
22 / Chapter 4
A60 /c Incandescent GLS lamp Ø 60 mm transp. 15–100 W CLASSIC A CL Standard A55 CL A1/CL/E27 Normal E27 transp.
R80 Incandescent reflector lamp Ø 80 mm 40–100 W CONCENTRA R80 Reflector NR80 R80/E27 Refl. R80
PAR38 Parabolic incandescent reflector lamp 60–120 W CONCENTRA PAR38 PAR38/E27 PAR38
Ø 38/8" = approx. 122 mm PAR38
QPAR51 /GU10 Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 35–50 W HALOPAR 16 GU10 Twistline Pro Alu Q MR16 HI-SPOT ES 50
voltage, with parabolic aluminium
reflector Ø 51 mm GU10 cap
QT32 /m Halogen incandescent lamp for mains volt., 60–250 W HALOLUX CERAM HalogenA Pro --- DLX-T Tube satin
tube-shaped Ø 32 mm frosted outside E27 AM Tubular FR
QT-DE12 Halogen incandescent lamp for mains 60–2000 W HALOLINE Plusline Pro K /Q T3/CL halogen rod
voltage, cap at both sides Ø 12 mm
QT12-ax-LP LV halogen incandescent lamp Ø approx. 20–100 W HALOSTAR Capsuleline Pro Q T3/12V GY6.35 Halogen Axial
12 mm axial filament low-pressure system STARLITE GY6,35
Low-pressure 12 V
QR-CBC51 LV halogen incandescent lamp with 20–65 W DECOSTAR Brilliantline Pro Precise MR16 /CG SUPERIA 50
cold-light specular reflector Ø 51 mm Dichroic
and glass cover
QR111 /24° LV halogen incandescent lamp with 35–100 W HALOSPOT 111 FL Aluline Pro 111 AR111 12V FL ---
reflector Ø 111 mm 24D
Radiation angle 24°


High-pressure discharge lamps
HME High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp 50–1000 W HQL HPL-N Kolorlux Standard HSL-BW
ellipsoidal
HIT Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 35–150 W HQI-T --- Arcstream ARC/T HSI-T
quartz discharge tube
HIT-CE UVr Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 35–250 W HCI-T MASTER Colour ConstantColor CMI-T UVS
ceramic discharge tube, reduced CDM-T CMH /T/UVC
UV radiation
HIT-TC-CE Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, with 20–70 W HCI-TF PB, MASTER Colour SuperMini CMH/T, CMI-TC
ceramic discharge tube, compact design HCI-TC PB CDM-Tm, CDM-TC, CMH/TC
CDM-Elite-TC
HIT-DE-CE Metal halide lamp, tube-shaped, cap at 70–250 W HCI-TS MASTER Colour ConstantColor CMI-TD UVS
both sides, with ceramic discharge tube CDM-TD CMH /TD/UVC
HIE-P Metal halide lamp, ellipsoidal, with quartz 70–400 W HQI-E/P MASTER HPI --- Britelux HSI-SX/P
discharge tube and anti-burst tube for Plus BU-P
open luminaires
HST-CRI GX12 High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 50–100 W --- MASTER SDW-TG --- ---
tube-shaped, colour-improved, GX12 cap
HST-MF High-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 50–1000 W NAV-T SUPER MASTER SON-T Pro Lucalox LU /HO/T/40 SHP-TS
tube-shaped, increased luminous flux
Low-pressure discharge lamps
LST Low-pressure sodium-vapour lamp, 18–180 W SOX MASTER SOX --- SLP
tube-shaped
Chapter 4 / 23
ma g n e t i c l ow- l o s s b. e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
Lamp name Colour Colour rendition Base Luminous System Lamp System Lamp Max. system lu-
temperature index Ra flux in lm power service life* power service life* minous efficiency
(at 25°C) in W in h in W in h in lm/W
24 / Chapter 4
Fluorescent lamps
T 16 14 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 1,200 16–18 20–24,000 84
T 16 21 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 1,900 24 20–24,000 87
T 16 24 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 1,750 27 20–24,000 74
T 16 28 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 2,600 31–33 20–24,000 93
T 16 35 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 3,300 39–41 20–24,000 93
T 16 39 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 3,100 46 20–24,000 76
T 16 49 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 4,300 54 20–24,000 90
T 16 54 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 4,450 61 20–24,000 81
T 16 80 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 6,150 approx. 88 20–24,000 82
T16-I 24 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 1,950 27 24,000 72
T16-I 39 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 3,400 46 24,000 74
T16-I 49 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 4,750 54 24,000 88
T16-I 54 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 4,850 61 24,000 80
T16-I 80 W ww, nw ≥80 G5 6,800 approx. 88 24,000 approx. 77
T16-I 95 W ww, nw ≥80 GX5 7,300 approx. 105 24,000 approx. 70
T16-I 120 W ww, nw ≥80 GX5 9,200 approx. 130 24,000 approx. 71
T 16-R 22 W ww, nw ≥80 2GX13 1,800 26 12,000 69
T 16-R 40 W ww, nw ≥80 2GX13 3,200 45–47 12,000 71
T 16-R 55 W ww, nw ≥80 2GX13 4,000 60 12,000 67
T 16-R 60 W ww, nw ≥80 2GX13 5,000 66 12,000 76
T 26 18 W ww, nw ≥80 G13 1,350 25 13,000 19–20 16–20,000 68
T 26 36 W ww, nw ≥80 G13 3,350 42 13,000 36 16–20,000 89
T 26 58 W ww, nw ≥80 G13 5,200 66 13,000 54–57 16–20,000 93
Characteristic values of the major lamps
* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure)
Compact fluorescent lamps
TC-D/-DEL 10 W ww, nw ≥80 G24d-1/q-1 600 15 8,000 12 10,000 50
TC-D/-DEL 13 W ww, nw ≥80 G24d-1/q-1 900 17 8,000 14 10,000 64
TC-D/-DEL 18 W ww, nw ≥80 G24d-2/q-2 1,200 23 8,000 18–20 10,000 66
TC-D/-DEL 26 W ww, nw ≥80 G24d-3/q-3 1,800 31 8,000 28 10,000 64
TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 13 W ww, nw ≥80 GX24d-1/q-1 900 17 8,000 14 10,000 64
TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 18 W ww, nw ≥80 GX24d-2/q-2 1,200 23 8,000 18–20 10,000 66
TC-T(I)/-TEL(I) 26 W ww, nw ≥80 GX24d-3/q-3 1,800 31 8,000 28 10,000 64
TC-TEL(I) 32 W ww, nw ≥80 GX24q-3 2,400 35–36 10,000 68
TC-TEL(I) 42 W ww, nw ≥80 GX24q-4 3,200 46–47 10,000 69
TC-TEL(I) 57 W ww, nw ≥80 GX24q-5 4,300 62 10,000 69
TC-TELI 60 W ww, nw ≥80 2G8 4,000 65 20,000 62
TC-TELI 70 W ww, nw ≥80 GX24q-6 5,200 75 10,000 70
TC-TELI 85 W ww, nw ≥80 2G8 6,000 92 20,000 65
TC-TELI/-QELI 120 W ww, nw ≥80 2G8 9,000 128 20,000 70
TC-L 18 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 1,200 25 8,000 19 10,000 63
TC-L 24 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 1,800 30 8,000 25–27 10,000 72
TC-L 36 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 2,900 42 8,000 34–39 10,000 85
TC-L 40 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 3,500 45 10,000 77
TC-L 55 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 4,800 55–61 10,000 87
TC-L 80 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 6,000 85 10,000 71
TC-LI 40 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 3,500 45 10,000 78
TC-LI 55 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 4,800 55–61 10,000 87
TC-LI 80 W ww, nw ≥80 2G11 6,000 85 10,000 71
Chapter 4 / 25
ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b. e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
26 / Chapter 4
Induction lamps
LMG-IHf 55 W (QL 55 W) ww, nw ≥80 Special 3,550–3,650 55 60,000 64
LMG-IHf 85 W (QL 85 W) ww, nw ≥80 Special 6,100–6,300 85 60,000 71
LMG-IHf 165 W (QL 165 W) ww, nw ≥80 Special 12,000 165 60,000 73
Low-voltage halogen lamps
QT 12 35 W ww ≥90 GY6,35 600 4,000 16
QT 12 50 W ww ≥90 GY6,35 930 4,000 18
QR-CBC 51 35 W (8–60°) ww ≥90 GU5,3 **700–14,000 4,000 16
QR-CBC 51 50 W (8–60°) ww ≥90 GU5,3 **850–15,000 4,000 18
QR 111 75 W (8–45°) ww ≥90 G53 **1,700–30,000 3,000 10
QR 111 100 W (8–45°) ww ≥90 G53 **2,800–48,000 3,000 10
High-voltage halogen lamps
QT-DE 12 150 W L 114,2 ww ≥90 R7s 2,200 1,500 14
QT-DE 12 300 W ww ≥90 R7s 5,000 2,000 16
QT-DE 12 500 W ww ≥90 R7s 9,500 2,000 19
QT 32 100 W matt ww ≥90 E27 1,430 2,000 14
QT 32 150 W matt ww ≥90 E27 2,400 2,000 16
QT 32 250 W matt ww ≥90 E27 4,000 2,000 16
* Lamp service life = mean service life up to 50 % failure (exception: Philips QL up to 10 % failure) ** Axial luminous intensity in cd.
ma g n e t i c l ow-l o s s b. e l e ct r on i c b al l as t
Metal halide lamps
HIE 70 W ww, nw ≥80, ≥70 E27 4,900–5,000 82–96 6,000 80–83 6,000 63
HIE 100 W ww, nw ≥80, ≥70 E27 7,300–8,100 112–115 6,000 72
HIE 150 W ww, nw ≥80, ≥70 E27 10,500–12,500 168–177 6,000 172 6,000 74
HIE 250 W ww, nw, tw ≥90, ≥70, ≥60 E40 17,000–25,500 275–285 6,000 93
HIE 400 W nw, tw ≥90, ≥70, ≥60 E40 20,500–43,000 400–460 6,000 93
HIE 1,000 W nw ≥60 E40 95,000 1,050–1,065 6,000 90
HIE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 E27 5,000–6,000 85 9–12,000 72 9–12,000 83
HIE-CE 100 W (Ceramic) ww ≥80 E27 8,000–8,500 120 12,000 71
HIE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 E27 12,000–13,500 170 9–12,000 ca, 160 9–12,000 84
HIE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) ww ≥80 E40 24,500 270 12,000 91
HIT 70 W ww, nw ≥80 G12 5,200–5,500 82–96 6,000 80–83 6,000 69
HIT 150 W ww, nw ≥80 G12 13,000 168–177 6,000 172 6,000 77
HIT 250 W nw, tw ≥90, ≥70, ≥60 E40 19,000–21,000 275–285 6,000 76
HIT-TC-CE 20 W (Ceramic) ww ≥80 PGJ5/G8,5/GU6,5 1,615–1,700 ca, 24 7,500–9,000 71
HIT-TC-CE 35 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 PGJ5/G8,5 3,000–3,500 44–46 9,000 42–45 9–12,000 83
HIT-TC-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 G8,5 6,300–7,300 82–96 9,000 80–83 9–12,000 91
HIT-CE 35 W (Ceramic)) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 G12 3,100–3,500 44–46 9,000 42–45 9–12,000 83
HIT-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 G12 6,400–7,300 82–96 9,000 80–83 9–12,000 83
HIT-CE 150 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥80 G12 14,000 168–177 6,000 172 6–12,000 83
HIT-CE 250 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 E40/G22/G12 23,000–25,800 272 6–12,000 6–12,000 96
Chapter 4 / 27
28 / Chapter 4
Metal halide lamps
HIT-DE 70 W ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 RX7s 5,000–6,000 82–96 6,000 80–83 6,000 75
HIT-DE 150 W ww, nw, tw ≥90, ≥80, ≥70 RX7s 11,250 168–177 6,000 172 6,000 75
HIT-DE 250 W ww, nw, tw ≥90, ≥80, ≥70 Fc2 20,000 275–285 6,000 72
HIT-DE-CE 35 W (Ceramic) ww ≥80 RX7s 3,200–3,400 40–46 10,000 42–45 10,000 85
HIT-DE-CE 70 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 RX7s 5,700–7,000 89–95 7,000 80–83 7–15,000 79
HIT-DE-CE 150 W (Ceramic) ww, nw ≥90, ≥80 RX7s 13,500–14,200 168–177 12,000 172 12–15,000 80
HIT-DE-CE 250 W (Ceramic) ww ≥80 Fc2 24,500 275 12,000 89
High-pressure mercury vapour lamps
HME 250 W ww, nw ≥40 E40 13,000 266–270 8,000 48
HME 400 W ww, nw ≥40 E40 22,000 425 8,000 51
High-pressure sodium vapour lamps
HSE 250 W ww ≥60, ≥20 E40 22,000–32,000 275–285 10,000 112
HSE 400 W ww ≥60, ≥20 E40 36,000–54,000 440–450 10,000 120
HST-CRI 35 W (SDW-T) ww ≥80 PG12-1 1,300 41–42 10,000 31
HST-CRI 50 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 2,300–2,400 62 10,000 62 10,000 39
HST-CRI 100 W (SDW-T/-TG) ww ≥80 PG12-1/GX12-1 4,900–5,000 114–116 10,000 112 10,000 42
HST 250 W ww ≥60, ≥20 E40 23,000–33,000 275 10,000 116
HST 400 W ww ≥60, ≥20 E40 37,000–56,500 440–450 10,000 123
For an extensive table of lamp data, please refer to the Technical Appendix of the ZUMTOBEL product catalogue.
All data without engagement. In case of doubt, please contact the lamp manufacturer.
Energy efficiency of luminaires
Most of the electrical power is consumed in the lamp and its
control gear. In order to clarify the power consumption of the
ballast/lamp system, the European Union has adopted the energy
classification system (Directive 2000/55/EU on energy efficiency
requirements for ballasts for fluorescent lamps).
The EEI (Energy Efficiency Index) classifies ballasts into seven

categories:
Class Ballasts
A1 Dimmable electronic ballasts
A2 Reduced-loss electronic ballasts
A3 Electronic ballasts
B1 Magnetic ballasts, very low loss (low-loss ballast)
B2 Magnetic ballasts, low loss (low-loss ballast)
C Magnetic ballasts, moderate loss (conventional
ballast)
D Magnetic ballasts, very high loss (conventional
ballast)
Since 21 May 2002, it has been prohibited to sell class D

ballasts; class C ballasts have ceased to be produced since
21 November 2005 at the latest.
Example for T26 36 W 840:
EEI
A1 ≤ 19 W (25 % dimming is equivalent to 50 % A3)
A2 ≤ 36
A3 ≤ 38
B1 ≤ 41
B2 ≤ 43
C ≤ 45
D ≤ 45
Chapter 4 / 29
ZUMTOBEL names DOD DALI DALI only DSI 1–10 V Heavy-duty e.b. Electr. ballast
Switchable at zero power • • • •
Dimmability subsequently enabled •
Dimmability • • • •
DALI-addressable • • •
30 / Chapter 4
Configurable • • •
Error and status feedback • • •
Dimming automatically blocked in DC mode • • •
Emergency lighting level adjustable for DC mode • •
Emergency lighting-compatible DC mode • • • • • • •
Critical operating conditions •
Special features DALI-switchable Addressability: Addressability: Luminaires can Luminaires can Long service life Long lamp
Dimming function individual individual be dimmed be dimmed up to service life
can be enabled dimming dimming collectively collectively 1,000,000 h High-quality light
Overview of electronic ballasts
subsequently via Flexible grouping Flexible grouping No readdressing Can be used Ambient thanks to high-fre-
Litenet without rewiring without rewiring required when with some temperatures quency operation
Luminaire status Luminaire status replacing reservations in up to 70°C More application
feedback feedback control gear emergency Integral over-/ options owing to
DSI control lighting undervoltage DC operation
also possible installations identification Faulty lamps automa-
For detailed information on ambient tically switched off
conditions and conditions of use, please and switched on again
refer to the product data sheets. after lamp replacement
Power consumption –20 % to –88 % Energy saving at
normal operation Set-AC
compared with conventional
function of dimmer setting

55 W
Power consumption as a
55–8 W ballasts 20 % to 88 %
45 W
P at 1 % dimming level (off)
35 W
C
A 25 W
8W 8W
69 W 8W
100 % 75 % 50 % 25 % 1%
Conventional ballast Controlled by LUXMATE Dimmer setting
9:00 10:00 11:00 12:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00
Power requirement of a
traditional freestanding luminaire Potential energy savings
using daylight sensors
and presence detectors
up to 70 %
compared with
constant light
e.g. free-
Power requirement of a freestanding standing
luminaire using SensControl
luminaire
using
SensControl
▼
absent absent cloud cover

▼
▼ ▼
▼▼
increasing daylight sufficient daylight decreasing daylight

Light required in terms of ergonomics using SensControl
Set-DC Emergency lighting extra

in (%) function in Tridonic PCA
100
Thanks to a reducible DC
90
dimming level (Set-DC), the
80 emergency lighting installation
AC-mode potential
70 energy saving can be designed for reduced
60 of 52 % operation. At a luminous flux
DC-mode
50 of 10 %, savings of up to 70 %
40 are possible at DC operation.
30
20 further potential
saving of 27 %
10
0 Power (W)
59 53 48 43 39 35 30 28 22 17 12 10 at 230 V DC
Chapter 4 / 31
Overview of LED control gear
Cable length vs. active power for 24 V DC supply
Cable lengths are limited exclusively on the assumption that a
maximum voltage drop of 0.7 V is permissible.
Cable cross-section/length:
Output Current Voltage 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
10 W 0.417 A 24 V 35.0 m 47.0 m 70.5 m 117.5 m
15 W 0.625 A 24 V 23.5 m 31.0 m 47.0 m 78.5 m
20 W 0.833 A 24 V 17.5 m 23.5 m 35.0 m 60.0 m
30 W 1.250 A 24 V 11.5 m 15.5 m 23.5 m 39.0 m
40 W 1.667 A 24 V 8.5 m 11.5 m 17.5 m 29.5 m
50 W 2.083 A 24 V 7.0 m 9.0 m 14.0 m 23.5 m
60 W 2.500 A 24 V 5.5 m 7.5 m 11.5 m 19.5 m
70 W 2.917 A 24 V 5.0 m 6.5 m 10.0 m 16.5 m
80 W 3.333 A 24 V 4.0 m 5.5 m 8.5 m 14.5 m
90 W 3.750 A 24 V 3.5 m 5.0 m 7.5 m 13.0 m
100 W 4.167 A 24 V 3.5 m 4.5 m 7.0 m 11.5 m
110 W 4.583 A 24 V 3.0 m 4.0 m 6.0 m 10.5 m
Please note: maximum voltage drop permissible = 0.7 V
RGB and dimming of LED luminaires

For “dimming applications”, owing to partly high outputs and
accordingly possible interferences with electromagnetic compat-
ibility, other points must be taken into account:
A: control unit to C: control unit to LED lumi-

LED C004 amplifier naire/luminaire group
The cable between control unit In order to avoid interfer-
and amplifier (LED C004) may ences with electromagnetic
be up to 20 m long. Make sure compatibility, the use of
that the minimum input volt- shielded cables for the lead
age of the amplifier’s control between control unit and LED
input is at least 12 V. luminaires is recommended
B: LED C004 amplifier to for cables longer than 0.5 m.
first LED luminaire Even if cables are shielded,
cables longer than 15 m may
lead to electromagnetic com-

patibility interferences in highly
sensitive areas.
32 / Chapter 4
D: mains unit to LED lumi- LED luminaire is specified in
naire/luminaire group the table. Control gear should
The maximum cable length possibly be placed next to the
between mains unit and last luminaires.
A
C
+ Ch 1-3
Control unit
e.g. C002, K211
– Ch 1
– Ch 2
– Ch 3 B
+ + Uin + Ch 1-3
– – Uin Amplifier LED luminaire
+ Ch 1-3 e.g. LED C004
Mains unit 12/24 V – Ch 1 – Ch 1
e.g. K240 – Ch 2 – Ch 2
– Ch 3 – Ch 3
Cable length for supplying Please note: use copper

current-controlled LEDs, cables. Cables must not be
switchable laid in parallel to mains/high-
Cable lengths are limited voltage conductors.
exclusively on the assump-
tion that a maximum voltage Cable length for supplying
drop of 0.7 V is permissible. current-controlled LEDs,
In each case, they relate to dimmable PWM
the last luminaire in a group. The max. cable length to a
It is assumed that the control group’s last luminaire may be
gear operates at max. capacity 13 m. The cable cross-sec-
– for details, please refer to tion has to be > 0.25 mm2.
the control gear’s technical For cables longer than 1.5
description. A minimum volt- m, shielded cables have to
age of 4.5 V is assumed for be used.
each LED.
Cable cross-section/length
Current for LED lum. 0.75 mm2 1 mm2 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
350 mA 30.0 m 40.0 m 60.0 m 100.0 m
700 mA 15.0 m 20.0 m 30.0 m 50.0 m
Chapter 4 / 33
Mains 24 V-DC
Monochrome
LED-mains unit
LED luminaires,
voltage controlled
On/Off
24 V SYSTEMLED Flood LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V MICROS LED 24 V

Mains
34 / Chapter 4
24 V-DC PWM
* These luminaires must be DALI/DSI/switchDIM
additionally supplied with 24 K210 24 V-DC
Mains
V DC supply voltage!
LED-mains unit
24 V-DC SYSTEMLED Flood* LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V

Mains
24 V-DC PWM
Dimming
LED-mains unit
Max. 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear C001
or max. 3 x control voltage 0–10 V
SYSTEMLED Flood* LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED 24 V

24 V RGB LED Mains 24 V-DC PWM
DALI K211
luminaires in Mains 24 V-DC
dynamic colours LED-mains unit
Mains 24 V-DC SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB PHAOS lighting tile
* These luminaires must be 24 V-DC PWM
LED-mains unit
additionally supplied with 24
V DC supply voltage! 3 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear C001
or 3 x control voltage 0–10 V
LED-mains unit 24 V-DC PWM
DALI
C003
24 V-DC PWM
LED-mains unit
1 POTI 100 K/Ohm linear C002
Application C004
SYSTEMLED Flood RGB* LEDOS 24 V RGB SYSTEMLED Deco RGB KAVA LED RGB PHAOS lighting tile
Mains 24 V-DC
with sequencer
PWM amplifier
24 V-DC PWM
LED-mains unit
Autom. colour sequence Colour sequence can be selected with DALI, 0–10 V
for controlling
PWM control signal C004
LED objects with (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K210, K211)
higher output
The C004 amplifier is used where the luminaire output is higher LEDOS 24 V SYSTEMLED Deco KAVA LED PHAOS lighting tile
Chapter 4 / 35
than the output power of the control unit used. mono/RGB mono/RGB mono/RGB
Mains 350 mA
Monochrome
LED mains unit
350 mA LED lumi- (constant current)
naires, current-
On/Off
controlled LEDOS B ORILED PANOS S 100 LED

350 mA 350 mA 350 mA
Mains
36 / Chapter 4
350 mA PWM
PWM control signal LED mains unit
(e.g. C001, K210) (constant current)
dimmable via PWM
Dimming
LEDOS B ORILED PANOS S 100 LED

350 mA 350 mA 350 mA
350 mA RGB LED Mains 24 V-DC

350 mA PWM
luminaires in LED mains unit
PWM control signal C350 PWM dimmer
dynamic colours, (e.g. C001, C002, C003, K211)
current-controlled
Mains LEDOS B RGB PASO II RGB
350 mA 350 mA
350 mA PWM
Dali K350 DALI RGB
Constant-current
converter
Automatic colour sequence
with sequencer, DALI 0–10 V
LEDOS B RGB PASO II RGB

350 mA 350 mA

Chapter 5
Lighting and
room management
LUXMATE lighting management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Easy dimming with BASIC and DIMLITE . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 – 11
Plug & play with ZBOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 13
Creative solutions with EMOTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 15
Building-wide with LITENET and PROFESSIONAL . . . . . 16 – 19
LUXMATE lighting management –
The intelligent control system for individual rooms
and throughout buildings
Function Applications
LUXMATE LITENET (based on TCP/IP and DALI)
– Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Office building with high
– Maximum flexibility owing to requirements in terms
reconfiguration by software of flexibility, ergonomic com-
– Can be subsequently upgraded patibility and econ. efficiency
with extra functions (on demand)
– OPC and BACnet interfaces with other building services and BMS
– Optimised for TASK AREA concepts according to EN 12464
PROFESSIONAL
– Integration of ONLITE emergency lighting system
– Customised control concepts
LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (based on LUXMATE bus system)
– Artificial light/daylight/blinds – Conference rooms
LITENET
– Interfaces to media technology – Office buildings

– Integration of ONLITE – Shopping malls
emergency lighting system – Museums
– link to BMS and central – Industry
maintenance
LUXMATE EMOTION (based on DALI)
EMOTION
– Presence-based/daylight-based control – Shops

– Timer – Health & Care
– Special luminaires: RGB, Tempura – Wellness
– ACTIVE LIGHT lighting concepts – Control rooms
– Flexibility of individual – Offices
addressing/grouping – In the home
ZBOX
ZBOX
– Lighting scenes – Hotels

– RGB colour control – Private dwellings
– Nightlogic – Shops
– Webtool
LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE (based on DSI/DALI)
– Daylight-based – In the home
BASIC
– Infrared remote control unit – Small offices &

– Standard switch components surgeries

– No addressing, group dimming – Commercial premises
– Zero-power switching and dimming
Chapter 5 / 3
LUXMATE control unit Lamp control gear (electronic ballast, transformer, ...)
1. select appropriate lamp control gear
4 / Chapter 5
Lamps Dimming range All control gear with DALI/DSI control input
GLS lamps 0–100 % Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA
PAR lamps 0–100 % Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA
HV halogen incandescent lamps 0–100 % Phase dimmer: 500–1000–5000 VA
LV halogen incandescent lamps 0–100 % electronic dimmable transformer: 105 VA + 150 VA
Fluorescent lamps 1–100 % electronic dimmable ballast
LED 0–100 % electronic dimmable LED converter 1 ch./3 ch.
High-pressure discharge lamps cannot be dimmed PCI-FOX electronic ballast
Two steps to create your lighting solution
2. select control funtion required All modules available

Function Control Module name: DALI DSI for installation in
luminaire or recess
Dimming, 1 channel momentary-action switch, presence detector DALI-T DSI-T* into ceiling
* also available as
Dimming with LUXMATE BASIC/DIMLITE
Dimming, 1 channel, with 1 light-level memory momentary-action switch DALI-TD DSI-TD*

housing for installa-
Daylight-based dimming, 2 channels momentary-action switch, light sensor DALI-TLC DSI-TLC tion in switch cabinet
2 or 4-channel multifunction momentary-action switch Circle, light sensor, DIMLITE 4ch** (4-channel) ** only available as
housing for installa-
presence detector, IR remote control unit DIMLITE 2CH** (2-channel) tion in switch cabinet
User control units Control Units Lamp control gear Lamps
230/240 V 50/60 Hz
L
N DSI electronic ballast, max. 25
PE DALI electronic ballast, max. 25*
Control line Fluorescent lamps T26/T16
Conventional double e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm2, max. length 100 m TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL 12
momentary-action L 11
light switch N
On/Off Momentary-action switch control D1
L module with input for preset light level PCA 10
Dimming D2 9
N
Conventional momentary- T D1
or
T D2
action light switch DSI-TD DSI phase dimmer, max. 25
Preset/Dia Preset/Dia
DALI-TD DALI phase dimmer, max. 25*
L'
D1 N
D2 N
APD L Incandescent lamps/
and with dimming-level memory
L phase Alternative: Programming instructions for preset light level (Dia):

Connect terminals • Set brightness level required using HV halogen in-
L’ dimmed phase
“T ” and “T ” together momentary-action switch or candescent lamps max. 300 VA
N neutral
with a jumper if a single • Press the Preset/Dia switch for at DSI transformer, max. 25
PE protective earth momentary-action least 5 seconds DALI transformer, max. 25*
T momentary-action switch is used. max. 2 m
switch input
D control line D1
D2 TE
earth LV halogen incandescent
LUXMATE BASIC DSI-TD or DALI-TD
AC voltage * available on request lamps max. 105/150 VA
Arguments for your customers – Dimming range: 1 to 100 % light

– Lamps can be started at any dimming level
– Absolutely flicker-free dimming – Suitable for all major lamp types
– Simple to operate using conventional momentary-action light switches – Easy to install
throughout – Insensitive to mains fluctuations and interference
Dimming using conventional momentary-action light switches
– Hence ensures standardised design of light switches and sockets – Components can be delivered separately or pre-fitted in the luminaire
Chapter 5 / 5
– Any number of momentary-action light switches can be connected in parallel – Dimming-level memory
Daylight-based control with
DIMLITE and DALI/DSI-TLC
Applications
– Single and team offices
– Areas near windows in shopping centres
– Classrooms
– Industrial bays
– Gym halls
– Warehouses
0% 50 %
500 lx
artificial light
daylight
Arguments for your customers

– Dims the lighting from 100–1 %, based exactly on the daylight
available
– Accurate window-light sensor rather than error-prone room-
light sensor
– Energy savings of up to 75 %
– Brightness level can be changed at any time using momen-
tary-action dimmer switches
– Economically priced – short pay-back period
– Long lamp service life
– Option to connect presence detector
6 / Chapter 5
ED-EYE/LSD sensor positioning
Installed in Switch
luminaire cabinet
2 groups DALI-TLC/DSI-TLC DIMLITE 2ch
4 groups – DIMLITE 4ch
Chapter 5 / 7
DIMLITE Multifunctional lighting control
– Compact lighting control unit for 2/4 luminaire groups
– DALI and DSI outputs – automatic identification
– Reducing stand-by loss: automatic power disconnection of
lighting actuators via integrated relay
– Up to 3 lighting scenes, one of them with daylight-based con-
trol (depending on additional devices)
– Modular range of functions, to be individually combined:
− daylight-based control − lighting scene module
− presence detectors/movement sensors − group module
− infrared remote control unit − Circle comfort control unit
− AUTO setup: automatic initialisation, no addressing required
Design notes
− DIMLITE 2ch two-channel unit and DIMLITE 4ch four-channel
unit are identical except for the number of output channels and
corresponding key inputs.
− Maximum cable length for all control lines (Control-IN, DSI and
DALI): max. 300 m each at 1.5 mm².
− The DIMLITE outputs are DSI or DALI broadcast – no address-
ing is required during commissioning. Groups are assigned by
wiring the lighting actuators accordingly.
− Maximum of 25 DALI units (25 DALI loads) or 50 DSI units per
output channel.
− Only Zumtobel ED units may be connected to Control-IN.
Maximum of 8 ED units at Control IN (exception: max. 1 light
sensor).
− Up to 3 lighting scenes, depending on the control unit used;
each control unit will always call up the same scene 1, 2, 3
or OFF.
− The functions of the “ED-SDED2” ED unit may be selected
using the integrated rotary switch: either scene module (1, 2,
3, OFF) or group module (dimming of Group 1, 2, 3, 4).
− Conventional 230 V momentary-action switches can be con-
nected to the momentary-action switch inputs.
− PIR input to connect a conventional movement sensor.
− Relay for mains cut-off: 16 A resistive load; in case of higher
loads or capacitive/inductive loads, an external power contac-

tor is recommended.
8 / Chapter 5
User control units Control units Lamp control gear Lamps

L 230 V AC
N
PE
ED-Eye ED-Sens IR- ED-IR ED-SDED2 ED-SDED2 Circle Cxx
light sensor (PD+IR) TOUCH infrared group lighting control point
DIMLITE
Multi-sensor receiver module scene module comf. contr. unit T26/T16

DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load) TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
Load contactor L fluorescent lamps
(optional) N
DA PCA
DA T26/T16
TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
max. 300 m optional mains max. 300 m DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)
L fluorescent lamps
at 1.5 mm² isolation facility at 1.5 mm²
max. 8 max. 25 DALI N
DA PCA
ED units or 50 DSI DA T26/T16
Multifunctional lighting control
Relay per channel

TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)
L fluorescent lamps
N
Control IN DA PCA
DA T26/T16
Channels TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
3 + 4 only with DALI/DSI HFG (1 DALI load)
L fluorescent lamps
DIMLITE 4 ch N
DA PCA
DA
EMOTION-1RUK (10 DALI loads) e.g.: incandescent lamps
DA K
DA K’
Presence
detector TE one4all (1 DALI load) e.g.: incandescent lamps
L
N
DA
Lighting scene/ All groups Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 DA
autom. daylight-based control
Chapter 5 / 9
User control units Control units Lamp control gear Lamps
L 230/240 V 50/60 Hz Fluorescent lamps T26/T16
DSI electronic ballast, max. 25/group I, II TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
N DALI electronic ballast, max. 25 /group I, II
PE L 12
11
N
D1
Light-sensor line PCA 10
LSD D2
10 / Chapter 5
9
light sensor e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm2, max. length 100 m Group I
Daylight-based control unit installed

L in luminaire/recessed into ceiling
N
T1 T2 Se2Se1
Conventional double T3 D2 D1
momentary-action T4
G I G II PD in DSI-TLC D2 D1
light switch DALI-TLC
On/Off
Dimming
Daylight-based control for small rooms
Motion sensor/
Presence detector
L phase
N neutral or
PE protective earth Fluorescent lamps T26/T16
DSI electronic ballast, max. 25/group I, II TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
T momentary-action switch input DALI electronic ballast, max. 25/group I, II
L 12
PD presence detector input Control line 11
N
Se light sensor input e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 D1
D control line max. length 100 m D2 PCA 10
LUXMATE BASIC Daylight DSI-TLC or DALI-TLC
9
earth Group II
AC voltage

User control units Lamp control gear Lamps

L Mains 230/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz max. length of DALI line
N Ø
PE
L 2 x 0.50 mm² max. 116 m
N 2 x 0.75 mm² max. 174 m
DALI bus power supply
DA
2 x 1.00 mm² max. 232 m
DA
2 x 1.50 mm² > max. 300 m
L DALI electronic ballast

N
PE
DA PCA
DA
L DALI phase dimmer
N
DA DA DA DA PE
DA APD
DA
LUXMATE BASIC Circle Kit
DALI-CSS L DALI transformer

DALI-CSW N
PE
L phase DA
N neutral DA TE
optionally several supply via DALI control line * max. 64 DALI-compatible
PE protective earth
control points (3 DALI loads)
DA DALI control line lamp control gear
earth
AC voltage
DALI-based lighting control system for individual rooms

– Three lighting scenes can be called up using intuitive control unit – Several control units can be used in parallel
– Two luminaire groups can be individually dimmed – Easy installation
– Control of a max. of 64 DALI-controllable luminaires – Personal lighting scenes can be stored
Chapter 5 / 11
– Luminaires addressed via control unit
ZBOX plug&play system for hotel rooms,
private dwellings and shops
Plug&Play
– pre-addressed and pre- – direct connection via TCP-IP
programmed – transparency of costs
– plug-in connectors – can be upgraded
– local stand-alone or net- – 4 control points included
worked system – DALI Broadcast (no address-
– web tool for fine-adjustment, ing of loads, except for
no licence required RGB/W)
FAQs
What is the minimum load Does one always have to
to be applied to the univer- use a CIRCLE control unit?
sal dimmer? 20 W Via the SDED2 input module,
How many luminaires may conventional momentary-
be connected to a ZBOX action switches can be
Controller? integrated.
Max. of 300 W/channel or 10 How can the ZBOX be
DALI loads; total maximum upgraded?
output power per ZBOX: 16 A. All LUXMATE bus units can
Depending on the outputs of be connected to the ZBOX
the luminaires used, a varying Controller. It is also possible to
number of electronic ballasts network several Controllers. In
may be used for an automatic this case, the plug&play func-
circuit-breaker! tion may not work. It makes
What happens at the output sense to let an engineer do the
side during a short circuit? commissioning.
The dimming module has been Can the ZBOX also be used
fitted with overload protection for other applications?
for lighting loads, extremely For other applications such as
high inductive or capacitive nursing homes, private dwell-
loads may destroy the dim- ings or ordinary shops, the
mer. The relay contact and the function and control concept
Controller have no overload can be adjusted via the ZBOX.
protection; the electrician must WEBTOOL.
ensure proper selectivity of the
installation.
12 / Chapter 5
Bathroom Mirror Ceiling Wellness** Left bed/reading Right bed/reading Window
Group 2 Group 1
Group 9
Group 8 Group 7
Blinds/
curtain
** Luminaire pre-addressed, 4 channels

ZBOX wiring scheme
No phase dimmer
Ceiling
Entrance area Ceiling
Group 5 Group 3
Wall/table
optionally Group 4
Group 6
* Every luminaire optionally connected to phase dimmer, DALI and/or relay
Chapter 5 / 13
LUXMATE EMOTION Lighting control system
Operation/supply
Mains 230/240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
L
N
PE
Double Momentary-
EMOTION Touch/EMOTION Touch C momentary- action or Presence
action switch standard switch detector
L
N
COM T 1 T 2 COM T 3 COM T 4
DA DA DA DA EKXP installation box

DALI 1 DALI 2 (please order separately)
max.
DA 0.25 m
DA
COM T 1 T 2 T 3 T 4
EMOTION-BVS2*
EMOTION-EYE
(2 DALI loads)
EMOTION-SDED2
DA (2 DALI loads)
DA
DA DA DA DA
EMOTION-BV2*
DA DA
Line 1: Line 2:
DALI control line DALI control line EMOTION-SENS
e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 e.g. NYM 2 x 1.5 mm 2 (4 DALI loads)
max. length 300 m max. length 300 m
max. 64 users (addresses) max. 64 users (addresses)
99 DALI loads, 99 DALI loads,
actuators, inputs actuators, inputs
Cable lengths of DALI control line

IR-TOUCH
Conductor cross-sections
DALI control line Cable length
2 x 0.50 mm 2 116 m
2 x 0.75 mm 2 174 m
2 x 1.00 mm 2 232 m
2 x 1.50 mm 2 300 m
Switching lamps using LUXMATE EMOTION

Lamp type Safe installed load
EMOTION-1RUK EMOTION-4RUKS
A, PAR, QT 500 W 4 x 2,000 W
T16/T26 with low-loss ballast 250 W 4 x 920 W
(parallel p.f. corrected)
TC with low-loss ballast 250 W 4 x 800 W
(parallel p.f. corrected)
T16/T26/TC with electr. ballast 30A for 0.5 s max. 4 x 10A
LV with transformer 30A for 0.5 s max. 4 x 10A
HIT, SDW-T, HS, HM – 4 x 800 W
14 / Chapter 5
Lighting/emergency lighting
L 12
N 11
DA 10 Fluorescent lamps T26/T16
DA DALI electronic ballast one4all 9 TC-L/TC-DEL/TC-TEL
(1 DALI load)
K1
L K 1'
N K2
DA K 2'
DA K3
EMOTION-4RUKS K 3'
(1 DALI load) K4
K 4'
DA K
DA K'
EMOTION-1RUK e.g. incandescent lamps
(10 DALI loads)
L
EMOTION-CSX N L'
(3 DALI loads) DA N
DA Incandescent lamps/
EMOTION-APD HV halogen incandescent lamps
(1 DALI load)
L
DA DA N max. 2 m
DA
DA
TE one4all LV halogen incandescent lamps
(1 DALI load)
L
N R
DA G
DA B
LED luminaires
DALI-LED converter
(1 DALI load)
L 0/1–10 V units
N L' e.g. STARFLEX
DA N fibre optics
DA (1 DALI load)
EMOTION-ANAS
(1 DALI load)
L D1
N D2 25 DSI luminaires
DA D1
DA D2 25 DSI luminaires
DALI-2DSI
(1 DALI load)
L
N
DA
DA Locally supplied emergency luminaire
LOCAL CHECK NT1 NT3 LDE DO
(2 DALI loads)
L
N
DA
DA
Escape-sign luminaire
LOCAL CHECK
(1 DALI load)
Chapter 5 / 15
LUXMATE LITENET for any size of building
LITENET flexis N2 PC with LITENET insite
with server functions management software
Ethernet (TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink
Daylight
sensor
3 x 64 DALI Bus
Luminaires
Blinds Control points
LITENET economy – LITENET flexisN2 without

– up to 500 output rotating parts (wear-free)
addresses – optional LITENET incontrol
– no server required operating software
LITENET flexis N3 PC with LITENET insite

with server functions management software
Ethernet (TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink
Daylight
sensor
3 x 64 DALI Bus
Luminaires
LITENET compact – fail-safe thanks to RAID1

– up to 2,000 output – optional LITENET incontrol
addresses operating software
– no server required – optional BACnet and OPC
– LITENET flexis N3 in 19" rack interfaces
PC with LITENET insite

management software
LITENET flexis LITENET flexis LITENET flexis
N1 N1 N1
Ethernet ( TCP/IP) Netlink Netlink Daylight

sensor
3 x 64 DALI
Luminaires Standard L ITENET server

LITENET flexible – LITENET server extremely

– up to 10,000 output addresses fail-safe thanks to RAID1
(or more upon request) – optional LITENET incontrol
– can be cascaded as required operating software

– LITENET flexis N1 installed in – optional BACnet and OPC
switch cabinet interfaces
16 / Chapter 5
DALI – a must for modern office buildings
Benefits of DALI installation:
– Individual addressing:
As each luminaire can be addressed individually, the highest
flexibility requirements can be met and installation faults can
be avoided. Luminaires are grouped and assigned to control
units subsequently, via the easy to use LITENET-insite software.
– Status feedback from each individual luminaire:
Detailed knowledge about the installation’s state enable the
operator to optimise operation and maintenance. Moreover,
current alarms can be displayed by screen, printer, e-mail or
text message.
– Zero-power switching:
Both installation effort and space required in the switch cabinet
are reduced, as a switched phase is not required for each
luminaire.
ZUMTOBEL “Dimming on Demand” (DOD)
makes DALI available at a special price
Previously, users could only choose between switchable luminaires
with electronic ballast or more expensive luminaires based on
DALI. With a switchable DALI luminaire model, ZUMTOBEL is now
offering a real innovation providing cost benefits at all stages of a
project – from design through to actual operation of a building.
Operation
Purchase
Implementation
Project planning
Project stages
Modification costs with

Planning conventional luminaires
Design Modification costs with

DOD luminaires
Costs of modification
The models of this switchable luminaire originally supplied

already boast all the above-mentioned benefits. And if dimming
should be required at a later point in time – for instance for con-
venient control of scenes or economically efficient daylight-based
control, the dimming function can be purchased at any time via a

software upgrade, without any additional installation effort.
Chapter 5 / 17
LUXMATE PROFESSIONAL (selection)
Commissioning/user control units

LM-CG/ LM-PFC
LM-EG Installation-specific
Single-room LM-MPO operation IRED LM-IRB
solution LM-CPA/CPO
LM-XPO
Single-/
Multi-room solution LM-CS(X)
control point
RS-232 link to AV system IRS

ASCI plain text protocol
B1, B2
B 1 , B 2 , L, N B 1 , B 2 , L, N B1, B2, L, N
24VDC B1, B2 L, N
LM-SI03 24VAC
230
L, N VAC
B1, B2
LM-SDED
LM-SWED LM-RFR
LUXMATE Bus
For dimming and
Mains switching individual
DSI- or luminaire groups
DALI control
EnOcean
line
Function
Sensor cable switch with-
out battery
Room management/central control/automation
Screen Blinds Blinds

Motor 1 Motor 2
B1, B2 B1, B2 K1 B1, B2
LM-RV LM-2LSE LM-2JSM
Partition
switch
L, N L, N L, N
B1, B2 B1, B2 B1, B2
LM-2FSE LM-ZSM LM-iZSQ
L, N L, N L, N
Motor 1 Motor 2 Timer control Sequence

automation
Window Window B1, B2
LM-BVS35
L, N
18 / Chapter 5
Lighting management
LM-2RUK HIT/HST/HME lamps
L, N Electronic/conven-
K', K L, N tional ballast for
B1, B2 discharge lamps
Switching
LM-DSI up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts

L, N
D1, D2 D1, D2
B1, B2
L, N Fluorescent lamps
DSI dimming
up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts

up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts
L, N
LM-2TL D1, D2
LM 2TL DALI Fluorescent lamps
L, N D1, D2 LSD
B1, B2 option to connect a daylight sensor
D1, D2 to the LM-STL or LM-2TL/DALI
up to 10 DSI electronic ballasts

up to 10 DALI electronic ballasts
D1, D2
L, N
Daylight-based dimming (DSI or DALI)
DA, DA
PCA Fluorescent lamps
LM-DALI DA, DA
L, N Incandescent lamps/
DA, DA APD HV halogen incandescent lamps
B1, B2
DA, DA
up to 64 ballasts in
16 groups TE LV halogen incandescent lamps
DA, DA
LED converter LED luminaires
DALI dimming
ONLITE interface, emergency lighting
SB 64
Local check
LM-DALIS
repeater
SB 128 locally supplied LOCAL CHECK

local check emergency luminaire
CTP
LOCAL CHECK
escape-sign
luminaire
ONLITE interface for emergency lighting/local supply
Chapter 5 / 19
Chapter 6
Quickplan – calculating the n° of lum. required
Efficiency method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
PANOS HF/HG PSP+ 175/200/250 (partly PSP+). . . . . 4
PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PANOS L and H 200/250 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PANOS Q Low. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PANOS Q High . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
VAERO-S ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
OREA GZ-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
LIGHT FIELDS A-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) . . . . . . . . 16
MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surf.-mounted) . . . . 17
MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surf.-mounted/recessed) . 18
MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller (surf.-moun./rec.) 19
SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 EVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MIREL FEC2 T16 M600. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
MIREL FEC2 T16 M625. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16 (surf.-mounted/rec) . . 23
MIRAL FAC T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
CLARIS II MD-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
CLARIS II MD-D T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
CLARIS II MC-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
CLARIS II P-ID T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
CLARIS II P-D T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L . . . . . . . . . . 32
RTX II C or D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
RTX II C-ID T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Free-standing uplights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
TECTON(-I) + RW T16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
TECTON-IP louvre T16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TECTON D-ID and I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
COPA I 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
COPA I 400 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
COPA D HIT 70/150 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
COPA D 250 W QT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
COPA A-N HME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
COPA A-B, A-T, A-ASY HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
COPA A-ASY HIT/HST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
PERLUCE D/O. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
RAIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
SCUBA T26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CLEAN Classic C-O/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
CLEAN Advanced A-C/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
CLEAN Supreme S-C/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Efficiency method
The Quickplan graphs have been calculated using the efficiency
method.
The following formulae can be used to give an approximate

figure for the mean illuminance and the number of luminaires
required.
n · z · ØL · MF · dB Em · A
Em = n=
A z · ØL · MF · dB
Em = mean illuminance n = number of luminaires

z = number of lamps per luminaire MF = maintenance factor
ØL = luminous flux of the lamp* A = floor area
dB = utilization factor (= dLB · dR )
dLB = luminaire efficiency
dR = room utilization factor
– Standard UGR values and maintained luminance levels for

luminance limit angle (e.g. 65° or 75°) all around the luminaire
– Correction factors for dark rooms and different ceiling heights
(no. of luminaires x factor)
– Maintenance factor uses an assumed value (graphs calculated
using MF = 0.8)
– Uniformity: max. luminaire spacing to achieve a uniformity
greater than or equal to 0.7
Please note: with maximum spacing between luminaires, the illuminance level
required is usually not achieved.
* Luminaire efficiency generally relates to laboratory measurements at an ambi-

ent temperature of 25 °C. For designing, it is therefore required to use the
rated luminous flux levels of lamps at 25 °C in the calculation programmes
and/or when applying the efficiency method.
Today, these values are usually calculated on a computer-aided basis, by

accessing luminaire databases.
Chapter 6 / 3
500 lx PANOS HF/HG PSP+175/200/250 (partly PSP+) 300 lx
140 86 Correction factors
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20
130 80 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
4 / Chapter 6
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° / *75°
120 PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W PSP+ (175) < 19 < 19 *200 cd/m 2 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) 72 • Ceiling
PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W (200) < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2
Floor area
110 PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (200) < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2 2/13 W PSP+ (175)
66 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
100 PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W PSP+ (250) < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 60 4m 1.2 1.1
PANOS HF/HG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) < 22 < 19 1000 cd/m2
90 PANOS HF/HG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) < 19 < 16 200 cd/m2 54 5m 1.4 1.2
80 48 6m 1.6 1.3
70 2/26 W (200) 42
60 2/26 W PSP+ (200) 36 Maintenance factor (MF)
50 2/26 W TC-DEL (250)
30 Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.78
40 2/26 W PSP+ (250) 24 Lamp operation 2000 h
30 18 Luminaire maintenance 1 year
20 12 Room maintenance 3 years
10 6
Uniformity Axial spacing up to 2.8 m
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 (2/26 200), 2.9 m (2/13, 2/26 PSP+ 250)
2 3.2 m (2/13 PSP+, 2/26)
Floor area m
500 lx PANOS LF/LG TC-DEL 175/200/250 300 lx

130 80 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 75°
120 PANOS LF/LG 2/13 W TC-DEL (175) < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2 72 • Ceiling
PANOS LF/LG 2/18 W TC-DEL (200) < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2
Floor area
110 PANOS LF/LG 2/26 W TC-DEL (250) < 22 < 22 < 200 cd/m 2
66 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
100 60 4m 1.2 1.1
90 2/13 W (175) 54 5m 1.4 1.2
80 48 6m 1.6 1.3
70 2/18 W (200)
42
60 36 Maintenance factor (MF)
50 30 Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.78
2/26 W (250)
40 24 Lamp operation 2000 h
10 6
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 3.7 m (2/18 W), up to 4 m
(2/13 W, 2/26 W), up to 4.4 m (2/32 W)
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 5
500 lx PANOS LG/LG PSP+ M LG TC-TEL 250 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
6 / Chapter 6
50 PANOS LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250) < 28 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2 30 • Ceiling Floor area
PANOS LG 2/32 W PSP+ TC-TEL (250) < 25 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2
PANOS M LG 2/32 W TC-TEL (250) < 25 < 25 < 1000 cd/m 2
height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
LG 2/32 W
LG 2/32 W PSP+ 6m 1.6 1.3
30 M LG 2/32 W 18
Maintenance factor (MF)
Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.78
20 12
Lamp operation 2000 h
Luminaire maintenance 1 year
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 4.7
2
Floor area m
500 lx PANOS S HIT-CE 150/200/250 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv.
25 PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (150) FL G8.5 < 22 < 22 15 • Ceiling Floor area
PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-CE (200) FL G12 < 22 < 22
PANOS S 1/70 W HIT-DE (250) < 28 < 28 1/70 W (150) FL
1/70 W (200) FL 4m 1.2 1.1
20 1/70 W (250) 12 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
15 9
10 6
5 3 Room maintenance 1 year
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 1.7 m,
Floor area m2 and 1/70 W 250 up to 4 m
Chapter 6 / 7
500 lx PANOS L and H 200/250 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
8 / Chapter 6
PANOS LG 2/18 W (200) < 22 < 22 *< 200 cd/m 2
50 PANOS LG PSP+1/32 W (200) < 22 < 22 *< 200 cd/m 2
50 • Ceiling Floor area
PANOS HG 2/26 W (250) < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m 2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
PANOS HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250) < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m 2
LG 2/18 W (200) 4m 1.2 1.1
40 40 5m 1.4 1.2
LG 1/32 W PSP+ (200)
6m 1.6 1.3
30 HG 2/26 W (250) 30
HG 1/42 W PSP+ (250)
20 20
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 3.9 m for LG,
2 and 2.9 m for HG
Floor area m
500 lx PANOS Q Low 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
PANOS Q LF 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) < 28 < 25
50 PANOS Q LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) < 28 < 25
PANOS Q LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) < 25 < 25 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
PANOS Q LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) < 28 < 25 LL 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) 4m 1.2 1.1
40 LM 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) 40 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 30
LF + LG 1/32 W TC-TELI (190) Maintenance factor (MF)
20 20
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Max. axial spacing up to 5.8 m
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 9
500 lx PANOS Q High 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
10 / Chapter 6
50 PANOS Q HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250) < 19 < 16 30 • Ceiling Floor area
PANOS Q HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250) < 19 < 19
PANOS Q HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250) < 22 < 19
PANOS Q HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250) < 22 < 19 HG 2/18 W TC-TELI (250) 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
HG 2/26 W TC-TELI (250) 6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
HG 2/32 W TC-TELI (250) Maintenance factor (MF)
20 HF 2/42 W TC-TELI (250)
12
Uniformity
2
Floor area m
500 lx VAERO-S ID 300 lx

Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55° 65°
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
VAERO-S ID 2/28 W SR ASI1000 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2
50 VAERO-S ID 2/35 W SR ASI1000 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1000 cd/m2
VAERO-S ID 2/49 W SR ASI1000 <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2 < 1500 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
VAERO-S ID 2/54 W SR ASI1000 <13 <13
VAERO-S ID 2/80 W SR ASI1000 <13 <13
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
2/28 W 6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
2/35 W Maintenance factor (MF)
2/54 W Clean medium-sized room MF= 0,77
20 2/49 W 12
2/80 W Luminaire maintenance 1 year
Uniformity
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 11
500 lx OREA GZ-ID T16 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
12 / Chapter 6
OREA GZ-ID 2/54 W T16 <13 <13
25 OREA GZ-ID 2/49 W T16 <13 <13 2/49 W 15 • Ceiling Floor area
OREA GZ-ID 2/80 W T16 <13 <13 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
4m 1.2 1.1
20 12 5m 1.4 1.2
2/54 W
2/80 W
6m 1.6 1.3
15 9
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 5.6 m
2
Floor area m

500 lx LIGHT FIELDS surface-mounted 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
L-FIELDS A 2/28 W < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
50 L-FIELDS A 2/35 W < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
L-FIELDS A 4/14 W < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
4/14 W
30 18
2/35 W Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.77
20 12
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up to

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 3.7 m (2/28 W, 2/35 W), axial spacing up to
3.4 m (2/24 W, 4/14 W)
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 13
500 lx LIGHT FIELDS recessed T16 M625 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
14 / Chapter 6
L-FIELD 2/24 W T16 < 16 < 16
50 L-FIELD 2/28 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
L-FIELD 2/35 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
L-FIELD 4/14 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
2/24 W 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
4/14 W
30 18
20 12

3.4 m (4/14 W)
Floor area m2
500 lx LIGHT FIELDS A-ID 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
L-FIELDS A-ID 2/49 W <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2
50 L-FIELDS A-ID 2/54 W <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2
L-FIELDS A-ID 4/24 W <13 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
4/24 W
20 12
2/49 W

3.1 m (4/24 W)
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 15
500 lx MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (recessed) 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
16 / Chapter 6
ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC–L M600 < 22 < 19 • Ceiling
50 ML4 B EM 1/55 W TC-L M625 < 22 < 19
30 Floor area
ML4 A EM 2/35 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M600 < 19 < 22 4m 1.2 1.1
ML4 A EM 2/49 W T16 M625 < 19 < 22
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
EM 1/55 W TC-L 625 6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
EM 1/55 W TC-L 600 EM 2/35 W T16
EM 2/49 W T16 Clean medium-sized room (T16) MF= 0.76
20 12
Cleaning of luminaires 1 year
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Max. axial spacing up to 5.4 m (1/55 W)
Floor area m2 or 4.7 m

500 lx MELLOW LIGHT IV Microprismatic (surface-mounted) 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
ML4 A AM 1/54 W T16 < 19 < 16
50 ML4 B AM 2/24 W T16 < 22 < 16
ML4 B AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16 < 25 < 19 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
ML4 B AM 2/40 W TC-L < 25 < 19
ML4 A AM 2/49 W T16 < 22 < 19
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
AM 2/24 W T16 AM 1/54 W T16
6m 1.6 1.3
30 AM 2/40 W TC-L 18
AM 2/24 W + 2/24 W T16
Clean medium-sized room (T16) MF= 0.76
20 AM 2/49 W T16
12
Uniformity Max. axial spacing up to

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 6.8 m (2/24 W + 2/24 W, 2/40 W),
5.9 m (2/24 W), 4.5 m (1/54 W, 2/49 W)
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 17
500 lx MELLOW LIGHT IV – Louvre (surface-mounted/recessed) 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
18 / Chapter 6
ML IV A AC 2/35 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
50 ML IV A AC 2/49 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
ML IV A AC 2/54 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
ML IV B EC 1/55 W TC-L M625 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
EC 2/24 W T16
ML IV B EC 2/24 W T16 M625 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m2
4m 1.2 1.1
40 ML IV A EC 2/54 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
24 5m 1.4 1.2
EC 1/55 W TC-L
6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
AC 2/35 W T16 EC 2/54 W T16
20 AC 2/49 W T16 12
AC 2/54 W T16 Cleaning of luminaires 1 year
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4 m,
2 axial spacing up to 4.7 m (2/24 W)
Floor area m
500 lx MELLOW LIGHT IV – Grid-mesh controller 300 lx

60
(surface-mounted/recessed) 36 Correction factors
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
ML IV A AB 2/35 W T16 < 19 < 19 • Ceiling
50 ML IV A AB 2/49 W T16 < 22 < 19
30 Floor area
ML IV A AB 2/54 W T16 < 22 < 19 EB 2/24 W T16 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
ML IV B EB 1/55 W TC-L M625 < 22 < 22 4m 1.2 1.1
ML IV B EB 2/24 W T16 M625 < 22 < 19 AB 2/35 W T16
40 EB 1/55 W TC-L 24
ML IV B EB 2/54 W T16 M625 < 22 < 22 5m 1.4 1.2
AB 2/54 W T16 6m 1.6 1.3
30 EB 2/54 W T16 18
AB 2/49 W T16 Maintenance factor (MF)
20 12
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing, axial spacing up
Floor area m2 to 5.4 m/4.7 m (2/54 W EB)
Chapter 6 / 19
500 lx SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID T16 Electronic ballast 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
20 / Chapter 6
SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/35 W T16 <13 <13 < 500 cd/m 2
1/35 W
50 SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 1/54 W T16 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2
SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/28 W T16 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/35 W T16 <16 <13 < 1000 cd/m2 4m 1.2 1.1
SPHEROS D-ID/C-ID 2/54 W T16 <16 <16 < 1000 cd/m2
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
1/54 W 6m 1.6 1.3
30 2/28 W 18
2/35 W
20 2/54 W
12
Uniformity
2
Floor area m
500 lx MIREL FEC2 T16 M600 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M600 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
50 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M600 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 1/28 W 30 • Ceiling Floor area
MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M600 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M600 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M600 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
4m 1.2 1.1
40 1/35 W 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 1/54 W 18
20 12
Uniformity Continuous row spacing up

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 to 4.8 m (4/14 W) or 4.4 m (1/28 W,
Floor area m2 1/35 W, 1/54 W, 2/28 W)
Chapter 6 / 21
500 lx MIREL FEC2 T16 M625 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
22 / Chapter 6
MIREL FEC2 1/28 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
50 MIREL FEC2 1/35 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 1/28 W 30 • Ceiling Floor area
MIREL FEC2 1/54 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
MIREL FEC2 2/28 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
MIREL FEC2 B 4/14 W T16 M625 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
4m 1.2 1.1
40 1/35 W 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
1/54 W
30 4/14 W 18
20 12

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 to 4.8 m (4/14 W) or 4,4 m (1/28 W,
Floor area m2 1/35 W, 1/54 W, 2/28 W)

500 lx MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES – BWS T16 300 lx

30
(surface-mounted/recessed) 18 Correction factors
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 1/80 W T16 < 16 < 19
25 MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 2/80 W T16 < 19 < 22
MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 3/80 W T16 < 16 < 19 1/80 W height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
MIRAL/MIREL RAS/RES-BWS 4/80 W T16 < 19 < 22
5m 1.4 1.2
20 12 6m 1.6 1.3

2/80 W
4/80 W Room maintenance 1 year
5 3
Uniformity
Continuous row spacing up to 3.9 m
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
2
Floor area m
Chapter 6 / 23
500 lx MIRAL FAC T16 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
24 / Chapter 6
MIRAL FAC 1/28 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
50 MIRAL FAC 1/49 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
MIRAL FAC 2/54 W T16 < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m2 1/28 W height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 1/49 W 18
20 12
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Max. axial spacing up to 4.5 m (1/49 W)
2 or 3.9 m
Floor area m
500 lx MIRAL FAC-ID T16 1-lamp 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
MIRAL FAC-ID 1/28 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2 1/28 W
50 MIRAL FAC-ID 1/35 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2
MIRAL FAC-ID 1/49 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 500 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
MIRAL FAC-ID 1/54 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
4m 1.2 1.1
40 1/35 W 24 5m 1.4 1.2
1/49 W 6m 1.6 1.3
30 1/54 W 18
20 12
Uniformity
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 25
500 lx MIRAL FAC-ID T16 2-lamp 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
26 / Chapter 6
50 MIRAL FAC-ID 2/35 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 500 cd/m2
MIRAL FAC-ID 2/49 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 2/28 W
18
20 2/49 W
12
Uniformity
2
Floor area m
500 lx CLARIS II MD-ID T16 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
50 CLARIS II MD-ID 1/35 W T16 < 13 < 13 < 500 cd/m 2 30 • Ceiling Floor area
CLARIS II MD-ID 1/54 W T16 < 16 < 13 < 500 cd/m 2
CLARIS II MD-ID 2/35 W T16 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2
CLARIS II MD-ID 2/54 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 1/35 W 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
1/54 W
30 18
20 12
2/54 W Lamp operation 2000 h
Uniformity
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 27
500 lx CLARIS II MD-D T16 300 lx
130 80 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
28 / Chapter 6
120 CLARIS II MD-D 1/28 W T16 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2 72 • Ceiling
CLARIS II MD-D 1/49 W T16 < 19 < 19 1000 cd/m2
Floor area
110 66 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
100 60 4m 1.2 1.1
90 54 5m 1.4 1.2
80 48 6m 1.6 1.3
70 42
60 1/28 W 36 Maintenance factor (MF)
40 1/49 W
24 Lamp operation 4000 h
10 6
Uniformity
2
Floor area m
500 lx CLARIS II MC-ID T16 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
50 CLARIS II MC-ID 1/35 W T16 < 13 < 13 < 1500 cd/m2 30 • Ceiling Floor area
CLARIS II MC-ID 1/54 W T16 < 16 < 16
CLARIS II MC-ID 2/35 W T16 < 13 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2
1/35 W height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
CLARIS II MC-ID 2/54 W T16 < 16 < 16 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
1/54 W
6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
2/35 W
20 2/54 W
12
Uniformity
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 29
500 lx CLARIS II P-ID T16 300 lx
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
30 / Chapter 6
50 CLARIS II P-ID 1/35 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 30 • Ceiling Floor area
CLARIS II P-ID 1/54 W T16 < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 1/35 W
CLARIS II P-ID 1/49 W T16 < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
1/54 W
1/49 W
6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
20 12
Uniformity
Floor area m2
500 lx CLARIS II P-D T16 300 lx

130 80 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
120 CLARIS II P-D 1/28 W T16 < 22 < 22 1000 cd/m2 72 • Ceiling
CLARIS II P-D 1/49 W T16 < 25 < 25 1000 cd/m2
Floor area
110 66 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
100 60 4m 1.2 1.1
90 54 5m 1.4 1.2
80 48 6m 1.6 1.3
1/28 W
70 42
50 1/49 W
30 Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.79
10 6
Uniformity
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 31
500 lx 2LIGHT E1-Mini/TC-TELI/HIT and E3 TC-L 300 lx
130 80 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 55° / *65° / **75°
32 / Chapter 6
120 2LIGHT 1/75 W FL-S < 16 < 16 *200 cd/m 2 72 • Ceiling
2LIGHT 1/20 W S < 16 < 16 1000 cd/m 2
Floor area
110 1/75 W FL-S 66 height
2LIGHT 1/42 W E1 TC-TELI < 19 < 19 *1000 cd/m 2 up to 50 m² over 50 m²
100 2LIGHT 1/70 W E1 HIT G8.5 < 19 < 16 200 cd/m 2 1/20 W S 60
2LIGHT 1/80 W E3 TC-L < 19 < 19 **1000 cd/m 2
4m 1.2 1.1
90 2LIGHT 2/55 W E3 TC-L < 19 < 22 **1000 cd/m 2 54 5m 1.4 1.2
80 48 6m 1.6 1.3
70 1/42 W 42
60 36
40 1/80 W 24 Lamp operation (1/75 1000 h) 2000 h
30 18
1/70 W Room maintenance 1 year
20 12
10 6
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 3.4 m (1/42 W);
Floor area m2 up to 3.9 m (1/80 W)

500 lx RTX II C or D 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
RTX2 1/35 W + D < 16 < 16 < 200 cd/m2
50 RTX2 1/49 W + D < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m2
RTX2 1/54 W + D < 19 < 19 < 200 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
RTX2 2/35 W + D < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
RTX2 2/54 W + D < 19 < 22 < 1000 cd/m2 1/35 W 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
1/49 W
30 18
2/35 W
20 2/54 W 12
Uniformity
Floor area m2 1-lamp, up to 4 m 2-lamp
Chapter 6 / 33
500 lx RTX II C-ID T16 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
34 / Chapter 6
50 RTX2 C-ID 1/35 W T16 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 30 • Ceiling
RTX2 C-ID 1/49 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2
Floor area
RTX2 C-ID 2/35 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
RTX2 C-ID 2/54 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 4m 1.2 1.1
1/35 W
40 24
5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
1/49 W
30 18
20 2/54 W 12 Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.79
Uniformity
2 1-lamp, up to 3.9 m 2-lamp
Floor area m

500 lx Free-standing uplights 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.5
LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/55 W TC-L <13 <13 < 1500 cd/m2
25 LIGHT FIELDS-S 3/80 W TC-L <13 <13
< 1500 cd/m2
KAREA-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L <13 <13 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
LANOS-S SYM 4/55 W TC-L <13 <13 4m 1.3 1.3
20 12 5m 1.7 1.4
6m 2.2 1.5
15 L-FIELDS 3/55 W 9
KAREA 4/55 W
LANOS 4/55 W Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.72
10 6
L-FIELDS 3/80 W
Uniformity
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 35
500 lx TECTON(-I) + RW T16 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
36 / Chapter 6
TECTON 1/54 W T16 + RW < 28 < 25
50 TECTON 1/54 W T16+PK+RW < 28 < 22
TECTON 2/54 W T16 + RW < 28 < 28 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
TECTON-I 2/54 W T16 + R < 25 < 25
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
1/54 W+PK 6m 1.6 1.3
30 1/54 W 18
20 12
-I 2/54 W
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5.6 m/4.8 m (-I 2/54 W+R)
2
Floor area m
500 lx TECTON(-I) + RW T16 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
TECTON 1/80 W T16 + RW < 28 < 25
50 TECTON 1/80 W T16+PK+RW < 28 < 22
TECTON 2/80 W T16 + RW < 28 < 28 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
TECTON-I 2/80 W T16 + R < 25 < 25
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
1/80 W+PK
20 12
10 -I 2/80 W 6 Room maintenance 1 year
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 5.6 m/4.8 m (-I 2/80 W+R)
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 37
500 lx TECTON-IP Louvre T16 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
38 / Chapter 6
TECTON-IP 1/54 W T16 < 22 < 19 • Ceiling
50 TECTON-IP 1/80 W T16 < 22 < 22
30 Floor area
TECTON-IP 2/54 W T16 < 22 < 22 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
TECTON-IP 2/80 W T16 < 22 < 22 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 1/54 W 18
20 2/54 W
12
2/80 W Luminaire maintenance 2 years
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 4.4 m
2
Floor area m
500 lx TECTON D-ML-B and ML-C 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
50 TECTON D ML-B 2/54 W < 22 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2 30 • Ceiling Floor area
TECTON D ML-B 2/49 W < 19 < 22 < 1000 cd/m 2
TECTON D ML-C 2/49 W < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
TECTON D ML-C 2/54 W < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24 5m 1.4 1.2
ML-B 2/49 W
6m 1.6 1.3
30 18
ML-B 2/54 W Maintenance factor (MF)
ML-C 2/49 W Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.79
20 12
ML-C 2/54 W Lamp operation 4000 h
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.5 m for
Floor area m2 ML-B and up to 3.9 m for ML-C
Chapter 6 / 39
500 lx TECTON D-ID and -I 300 lx
Correction factors
30 18
X=4H Y=8H / S=0.25H / Reflection factors 70/50/20 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25 (1.5 for D-I)
40 / Chapter 6
-
• Ceiling Floor area
25 TECTON D-ID 2/54 W T16 < 19 < 16 < 1000 cd/m 2 15
TECTON D-ID 2/80 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
TECTON D-I 2/54 W T16 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2 2/54 W + I ID I ID I
TECTON D-I 2/80 W T16 < 13 < 13 < 1000 cd/m 2
20 2/54 W + ID 12 4m 1.2 1.3 1.1 1.2
5m 1.4 1.7 1.2 1.4
2/80 W + I 6m 1.6 2.2 1.3 1.5
15 2/80 W + ID 9
Wartung (D-I 1/2 year) 1 year
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing D-ID up to
2 4.2 m, D-I up to 7 m
Floor area m

500 lx TECTON D-PL (Pool-Light) 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
25 TECTON D-PL 2/35 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 15 • Ceiling
TECTON D-PL 2/49 W T16 < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2
Floor area
TECTON D-PL 2/80 W T16 < 22 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
2/35 W 4m 1.2 1.1
20 12
5m 1.4 1.2
2/49 W 6m 1.6 1.3
15 9
2/80 W
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 6 m
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 41
500 lx COPA I 250 W 300 lx
Ceiling height: 6 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
42 / Chapter 6
1/250 W HIE RAB 19000 lm TST < 16 < 16 < 1000 cd/ m2
25 1/250 W HSE RAB 25000 lm TST < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/ m2
15
Clean large room MF=0.79 (HIE) MF=0.83 (HSE)
20 12
1/250 W HIE
Lamp operation 4000 h 8000 h
Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) 1 year 3 years
15 1/250 W HSE 9 Room maintenance 1 year 3 years
Uniformity
10 6 Axial spacing up to 5 m (TST)
5 3
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

2
Floor area m

500 lx COPA I 400 W 300 lx

Ceiling height: 6 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65°/75°
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
1/400 W HIE RAB 36000 lm < 19 < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2
25 1/400 W HSE RAB 36000 lm* < 19 < 19 75°< 1000 cd/m2
15
1/400 W HSE RAB 47000 lm** < 16 < 16 65°< 1000 cd/m2
Clean large room MF=0.70 (HIE) MF=0.83 (HSE)
20 12
Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) 1 year 3 years
15 9 Room maintenance 1 year 3 years
1/400 W HIE
1/400 W HSE*
Uniformity
10 6
Axial spacing up to 8.3 m
1/400 W HSE**
5 3 * (Colour rendition Ra > 60)
** (Colour rendition Ra > 20)
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 43
500 lx COPA D RKF/RKID 32/42/57/85 W 300 lx
Ceiling height: 4 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65° / 75° • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
44 / Chapter 6
COPA D 1/32 W RKF/RKID < 16 < 16 65°< 200 cd/m2
50 COPA D 1/42 W RKF/RKID < 19 < 19 75°< 200 cd/m2 1/32 W 30 • Ceiling Floor area
COPA D 1/57 W RKF < 25 < 25 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
COPA D 1/57 W RKID < 22 < 22 75°< 1000 cd/m2
COPA D 1/85 W RKF < 19 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2 1/42 W
5m 1.2 1.1
40 COPA D 1/85 W RKID < 19 < 19 65°< 1000 cd/m2
24
6m 1.4 1.2
30 1/57 W 18 Maintenance factor (MF)

Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 1 year
Room maintenance 2 years
10 6
Uniformity
Axial spacing up to 5 m, up to 5.4 m
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 (42 W RKF), up to 5.7 m (42 W RKID,
Floor area m2 57 W RKF, RKID)

500 lx COPA D HIT 70/150 W 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
COPA D 1/70 W HIT (6400 lm) < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m2
25 COPA D 1/150 W HIT (14000 lm) < 22 < 22 *< 1000 cd/m2
1/70 W
5m 1.2 1.1
20 12
6m 1.4 1.2

Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.77 (HCI)
1/150 W
5 3
Uniformity
Axial spacing up to 4 m
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 45
500 lx COPA D 250 W QT 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
46 / Chapter 6
COPA D 1/250 W QT < 19 < 19 <1000 cd/m2
50 30 • Ceiling Floor area
5m 1.2 1.1
40 24 6m 1.4 1.2
1/250 W
10 6
Uniformity
Axial spacing up to 4.5 m
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Floor area m2
500 lx COPA A-B HIT/HST 250 W 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
COPA A-B 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm) < 28 < 28
25 COPA A-B 1/250 W HST (23000 lm) < 28 < 25
15
COPA A-B 2/250 W HIT (40000 lm) < 28 < 28
COPA A-B 2/250 W HST (46000 lm) < 25
Clean large room MF=0.80 (HIT) MF=0.81 (HST)
20 1/250 W HIT 12
Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) 1 year 1 year
1/250 W HST
15 9 Room maintenance 2 years 2 years
2/250 W HST
Uniformity
10 6 Axial spacing up to: 7.5 m HST, up to 8.3 m
2/250 W HIT
2/250 W HIT, up to 9 m 1/250 W HIT
5 3
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

2
Floor area m
Chapter 6 / 47
500 lx COPA A-B HIT/HST 400 W 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
48 / Chapter 6
COPA A_B 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm) * < 28 < 28
25 COPA A_B 1/400 W HST (48000 lm) ** < 28 < 28
15
Clean large room MF=0.67 (HIT) MF=0.81 (HST)
20 12
Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) 1 year 1 year
15 1/400 W HIT 9 Room maintenance 2 years 2 years
Uniformity
10 6 Axial spacing up to 9 m
1/400 W HST
5 3 * (Colour rendition Ra > 90)
** (Colour rendition Ra > 20)
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

2
Floor area m
500 lx COPA A-N HME 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
COPA A-N 1/250 W HME (13000 lm) < 28 < 28
50 COPA A-N 1/400 W HME (22000 lm) < 29 < 29
30
Clean large room MF= 0.80
40 24
1/250 W
1/400 W Uniformity
20 12
Axial spacing up to 9 m
10 6
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 49
500 lx COPA A-B, A-T, A-ASY HST 300 lx
Ceiling height: 6 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
50 / Chapter 6
COPA A-B 1/600 W HST
COPA A-T 1/600 W HST < 25 < 28
5
8 Maintenance factor (MF)
COPA A-ASY 1/600 W HST
Clean large room MF= 0.83
4
6 Lamp operation 10000 h
Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 2 years
3 Room maintenance 2 years
A-T 1/600 W
4 A-B 1/600 W Uniformity
A-ASY 1/600 W 2
Axial spacing up to 6.3 m (ASY), up to
2 7.5 m (A-B)
1
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

2
Floor area m

500 lx COPA A-ASY HIT/HST 300 lx

Ceiling height: 6 m
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HIT (20000 lm)
25 COPA A-ASY 1/250 W HST (27000 lm)
15
COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HIT (32000 lm)
COPA A-ASY 1/400 W HST (48000 lm)
Clean large room MF= 0.81 (HST)
20 12
1/250 W HIT
Cleaning of luminaires (IP65) 2 years
15 1/250 W HST 9 Room maintenance 2 years
1/400 W HIT
10 6
1/400 W HST
5 3
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500

2
Floor area m
Chapter 6 / 51
500 lx PERLUCE D/O 300 lx
130 80 • Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1 (O=1.25)
52 / Chapter 6
120 PERLUCE D 1/49 W T16 < 16 < 16 <1000 cd/m 2 72
PERLUCE D 1/80 W T16 < 16 < 19 <1000 cd/m 2
110 PERLUCE O 2/18 W TC-L < 22 < 22
66 Maintenance factor (MF) (D) (O)
100 PERLUCE O 1/49 W T16 < 22 < 19 60 Clean large room MF= 0.79 (D) MF= 0.83 (O)
90 54 Lamp operation 4000 h 2000 h
O 2/18 W TC-L
80 48 Cleaning of lumin. (IP65) 2 years 1 year
70 42 Room maintenance 2 years 1 year
60 36
50 30 Uniformity
40 O 1/49 W T16 24 Axial spacing up to 3.9 m (D) and
D 1/49 W T16 up to 6.5 m (O)
30 18
D 1/80 W T16
20 12
10 6
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200

2
Floor area m
500 lx RAIN 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
RAIN 1/58 W T 26 < 28 < 22
50 RAIN 1/80 W T 16 < 29 < 25
RAIN 2/36 W T 26 < 28 < 22 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
RAIN 2/54 W T 16 < 29 < 22
4m 1.2 1.1
40 24
5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 1/58 W T26 18
1/80 W T16 Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.78
20 2/36 W T26 12
2/54 W T16
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 8 m
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 53
500 lx CHIARO FTR390/FTR680 T16-R 300 lx
80 Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 48
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
54 / Chapter 6
CHIARO FTR 1/40 W T16-R < 22 < 22
CHIARO FTR 1/55 W T16-R < 22 < 22
• Ceiling Floor area
70 CHIARO FTR 1/22 W+40W T16-R < 22 < 22 42 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
CHIARO FTR 2/40 W T16-R < 22 < 22
4m 1.2 1.1
60 36
5m 1.4 1.2
1/40 W 1/55 W 6m 1.6 1.3
50 30
22+ 40 W
10 6
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Axial spacing up to 4.5 m, up to 5 m 2/40 W
2
Floor area m

500 lx SCUBA T26 300 lx

• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.25
SCUBA 1/36 W T26 < 22 < 19 • Ceiling
25 SCUBA 1/58 W T26 < 25 < 19
30 Floor area
SCUBA 2/36 W T26 < 25 < 19 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
SCUBA 2/58 W T26 < 25 < 22 1/36 W 4m 1.2 1.1
20 24
5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
15 1/58 W 18
2/36 W
10 12
Uniformity
Floor area m2
Chapter 6 / 55
500 lx CLEAN C-O/R 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
56 / Chapter 6
25 CLEAN C-O 4/24 W T16 < 22 < 22 C-O 4/24 W T16 15 • Ceiling
CLEAN C-O 3/40 W TC-L < 25 < 25
Floor area
CLEAN C-R 3/55 W TC-L < 19 < 22 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
4m 1.2 1.1
20 12
C-O 3/40 W TC-L
5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
15 9
C-R 3/55 W TC-L
Lamp operation (-O = 4000 h) 3000 h
Cleaning of luminaires 2 years
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 4.5 m,
2 with 3/55 W up to 3.9 m
Floor area m

500 lx CLEAN A-C/O 300 lx

Ceiling height: 3 m UGR_axial UGR_transv. 65°/75°
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
50 CLEAN A-C 2/49 W T16 < 16 < 19 65° < 1000 cd/m2 30 • Ceiling
CLEAN A-O 2/49 W T16 < 22 < 22
Floor area
CLEAN A-C 3/40 W TC-L < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2 height up to 50 m² over 50 m²
CLEAN A-C 3/55 W TC-L < 19 < 19 75° < 1000 cd/m2 4m 1.2 1.1
40 24
5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
30 A-O 2/49 W T16 18
A-C 3/40 W TC-L
A-C 2/49 W T16
Lamp operation (TC-L 3000 h) 4000 h (T16)
A-C 3/55 W TC-L

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 to 3.9 m (2/49 W A-C), up to 4.5 m
Floor area m2 (2/49 W A-O), up to 4.2 m (TC-L)
Chapter 6 / 57
500 lx CLEAN S-C/R 300 lx
• Dark room (50/40/20): 1.1
58 / Chapter 6
25 CLEAN S-C 3/49 W < 16 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2 15 • Ceiling Floor area
CLEAN S-C 3/80 W < 19 < 19 < 1000 cd/m 2
CLEAN S-R 2/49 W < 22 < 22
4m 1.2 1.1
20 12 5m 1.4 1.2
6m 1.6 1.3
S-R 2/49 W
15 9
S-C 3/49 W
S-C 3/80 W Clean medium-sized room MF= 0.79
10 6
Uniformity
20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 Continuous row spacing up to 3.9 m and
2 up to 4.5 m (2/49 S-R)
Floor area m
Chapter 7
Technical information
Protection classes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
Fire protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–7
Explosion-proofness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
Requirements concerning safety – ball-proofness . . . . . 10
Clean-room technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 – 13
Chemical effects on materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 16
Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits . . . . . . . 17 – 24
Low-voltage installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 – 27
Protection classes
ZUMTOBEL luminaires are classified into the following pro-
tection classes – a measure intended to afford protection
against electric shock.
Class I luminaires
Class I is not identified by a symbol; the luminaire is
intended to be connected to a protective earth conductor
which bears the mark. Most ZUMTOBEL luminaires are
designed in accordance with protection class I unless
otherwise stated.
Class II luminaires
Class II luminaires have total insulation but no protective
earth terminal. The ZUMTOBEL range includes protection
class II luminaires, for instance moisture-proof batten
luminaires and moisture-proof diffuser luminaires.
Class III luminaires
Class III identifies luminaires that are intended for operation
with protective extra low voltage (50 V max.).
ZUMTOBEL architectural luminaires include class III
luminaires, e.g. PRIO low-voltage spotlights.
Protection class I
Protection class II
Protection class III
Degrees of protection
Degrees of protection indicate the following properties
of equipment:
– The quality of its protection against direct contact
– Its sealing against ingress of solid foreign bodies
(dust, stones, sand, etc.)
– Its sealing against the ingress of water
Chapter 7 / 3
The type of protection is defined by two degrees of protection in
accordance with IEC 529:
– Degree of shock-hazard protection and protection against

ingress of solid foreign bodies (1st digit)
– Degree of protection against the ingress of water (2nd digit)
For example IP 23:
IP 2 3
INGRESS PROTECTION
Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies
having Ø > 12 mm (medium-sized solid bodies),
insertion of fingers or objects.
Protection against ingress of water falling at any angle up to 60º from
vertical. There must be no adverse effect (spray water).
Degrees of protection for technical luminaires
Protection against ingress of solid foreign bodies as per

first digit
IP 0X Unprotected against ingress of solid foreign bodies
IP 1X Protection against solid bodies > 50 mm
IP 3X Protection against solid bodies > 2.5 mm
IP 5X Dust-protected (limited ingress of dust)
IP 6X Dust-tight (no ingress of dust)
Protection against moisture as per second digit

IP X0 No special protection
IP X1 Drip-proof – protection against water drops
IP X2 Protection against water drops up to 15º from the vertical
IP X3 Rainproof – protection against spray water up to 60º
IP X4 Splash-proof – protection against spray water from all
directions
IP X5 Jet-proof – protection against jets of water
IP X6 Protection against heavy seas (conditions on ship decks)
IP X7 Watertight – protection against immersion (pressure and
time specified)
IP X8 Protection against immersion under pressure (with

instructions from manufacturer)
4 / Chapter 7
Applications for luminaires with increased protection
Damp locations
Bakeries IP X1 The following generally
Manure sheds IP X1 applies:
Animal-feed preparation facilities IP X1 IP X5: for cleaning using
Industrial kitchens IP X1 water jets
Boiler rooms IP X1 IP X4: in rinsing areas
Commercial workshops IP 20
Granaries IP X1
(Deep-freeze) cold storage IP X1
Pump houses IP X1
Sculleries IP X1
Laundries IP X1
Wet locations
Beer or wine cellars IP X4 The following generally
Shower cubicles IP X4 applies:
Meat processing facilities IP X5 IP X5: for cleaning using
Electroplating facilities IP X4 water jets
Greenhouses IP X4
Dairies IP X4
Workshops using wet processes IP X4
Car wash areas IP X4
Agricultural facilities
Beer or wine cellars IP 44 The following generally
Shower cubicles IP 44 applies:
Stores, storerooms for hay, IP X5: for cleaning using
straw, feedstuff IP 44 water jets
Intensive stock farming IP 44 IP 54+FF: when increased
Animal sheds IP 44 fire risk
Adjoining rooms of animal sheds IP 44
Facilities with increased fire risk
Workrooms IP 50
Woodworking IP 50
Sawmills IP 50
Paper processing IP 50
Textile processing IP 50
Treatment and fabrication IP 50
Gymnasia and sports halls
Badminton courts IP 20 ballproof luminaires
Squash courts IP 20 ballproof luminaires with

Indoor tennis courts IP 20 all-round cover; maximum
Gymnasia and sports halls IP 20 mesh size 60 mm
Chapter 7 / 5
Fire protection
Luminaire identification marking
The following criteria must be taken into account:
– Position of normal use
– Fire behaviour of environment and mounting surfaces
– Minimum clearance from combustible substances and materials
Luminaires with thecmark

Luminaires which carry thecmark must be constructed so
that the temperature on the mounting surface does not exceed
130 °C during abnormal operation, and does not exceed
180 °C in the event of a ballast fault. Luminaires with this mark
are suitable for direct mounting on parts of buildings made of
non-combustible, flame-retardant or normally flammable building
materials according to DIN 4102.
Luminaires with the d/Umark

Both marks regulate the surface temperatures of luminaires.
External surfaces on which readily flammable substances such
as dust or fibrous materials may accumulate when luminaires
are installed as prescribed must not exceed specific tempera-
tures. The d luminaire mark was withdrawn in 1999.
A validity transition period allows the d mark to be used until
01. 08. 2005. TheUmark introduced in EN 60598 has applied
since 01.08.1998. The d mark limits the temperature on
horizontal surfaces to 95 °C during normal operation and 115 °C
in the event of a ballast fault. Temperatures must not exceed
220 °C on vertical surfaces. In order to fulfil the criteria of the
Umark, the surface temperature on horizontal surfaces must
not exceed 90 °C. The maximum temperature in the event of a
fault is 115 °C, the same as for the d mark. The temperature
must not exceed 150 °C on vertical surfaces.
Luminaires with theQmark

Luminaires which carry theQmark are intended for installation
in furniture. They are designed so that in the event of a ballast
fault, flame-retardant and normally flammable materials as speci-
fied in DIN 4102 cannot be ignited, e.g. in corners of wooden
furniture. The materials may be painted, veneered or varnished.
Luminaires with the q mark

Luminaires which carry the q mark are intended for mounting
in or on furniture made of materials whose flammability is not

known. They are designed so that in normal operation any mount-
ing surface or other adjacent furniture surfaces do not exceed a
temperature of 95 °C.
6 / Chapter 7
Fire protection: Place of use – Mark – Requirements
Chapter 7 / 7
Explosion-proofness
Flammable gases, vapours and mists
Zone O: A hazardous explosive atmosphere is present continu-
ously or long term.
Zone 1: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to

occur occasionally.
Zone 2: A hazardous explosive atmosphere can be expected to

occur only rarely and, if any, short term.
Combustible dusts
Zone 20 includes areas in which there is a permanent, long-
term or frequent explosive atmosphere consisting of dust-air
mixtures.
Zone 21 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere con-

sisting of dust-air mixtures can be expected to occur occasion-
ally and short term.
Zone 22 includes areas in which an explosive atmosphere can-

not be expected to occur due to disturbance of deposited dust.
If an explosive atmosphere should nevertheless occur, this will
most probably happen only rarely and short term.
Directive 94/9/EC
The “new” Directive 94/9/EC specifies the requirements for
all devices and protection systems for use in explosion-prone
areas. Over and above this, this Directive now directly includes
the “basic safety requirements” for explosion-proof equipment.
Manufacturers of explosion-proof equipment have to provide
evidence of a quality assurance system to be tested by a
“notified body”.
Directive 99/92 EC (Workplace Directive)

Also new is the description of hazard areas in explosion-prone
workplaces, and a resulting graded safety profile for the “equip-
ment” used. As this Directive was drafted according to the EC’s

“new approach”, the manufacturer’s declaration of conformity,
combined with CE marking of the products, was introduced
8 / Chapter 7
for explosion-proof equipment as well. A detailed commentary
on Directive 94/9/EC is included in the “Directive 94/9/EC by
the European Parliament and the Council of 23 March 1994”
section. Since 1 July 2003, it has superseded all directives on
explosion protection previously effective at European level.
Please note: The previous standard on construction and testing

of explosion-proof equipment for Zone 2 has been superseded
by ILC 60079-15/EN 60079-15, which specifies higher require-
ments for Zone 2 luminaires (higher requirements in terms of
electronic ballasts and impact resistance).
Equipment of Group 2 including potential ignition source
Equipment cat. 1 Equipment cat. 2 Equipment cat. 3
Yes Electrical No
appliance
Engine with
internal
combustion
Documentation Documentation
EC of notified body of manufacturer
type examination
Internal production control
Basic safety and health requirements
Classification of max. surface temperatures in electrical

equipment of Class 2
Temperature Max. permissible Ignition temperatures

class surface temperature of flammable
of equipment in °C substances in °C
T1 450 > 450
T2 300 > 300 ≤ 450
T3 200 > 300 ≤ 200
T4 135 > 200 ≤ 135

T5 100 > 100 ≤ 135
T6 85 > 85 ≤ 100
Chapter 7 / 9
Requirements concerning safety –
ball-proofness
Luminaires for sports halls must be ball-proof according to

DIN VDE 0710-13. Balls hitting luminaires must not damage
them so as to cause luminaire parts to fall down. In a test
conforming with the relevant standard, the luminaire has to with-
stand 36 hits from three directions at a maximum impact speed
of 60 km/h, the ball used having the size of a handball.
When choosing the luminaires, the rod guard’s grid width must
be matched to the sport played in the hall: it must always be
considerably smaller than the balls used, never of the same size,
as balls may get stuck in the guard.
As ball-proof luminaires, the ZUMTOBEL range includes the

RAS/RES-BWS louvre luminaire as well as the COPA-A high-bay
luminaire.
10 / Chapter 7
Clean-room technology
Clean-room compatibility tested

CLEAN Advanced and CLEAN Supreme have been tested and
assessed by the Fraunhofer Institute in Stuttgart (Germany) with
respect to
– clean-room compatibility for clean-rooms (particle emission
behaviour of the luminaires) and
– cleanliness compatibility (disinfectability, electrostatic behav-
iour and chemical resistance).
Details on clean-room compatibility:

The German VDI 2083 Guideline specifies a standardised
procedure for all equipment used in a clean-room.
The common criterion for the clean-room compatibility of
luminaires and all other equipment is their particle emission
behaviour. “Airborne particle emission” is used as a classification
criterion in all international standards. The relevant maximum
value for the permissible concentration of particles of a specific
particle size constitutes the class limit.
Test setup
A defined volume of air is aspirated by an air sampling probe and
fed into a test chamber. The particles inside this test chamber
are monitored and recorded appropriately.
Exceeding the relevant limit values is decisive in order to classify
the luminaires. If a limit value is not exceeded with a certainty of
at least 95 %, the respective item of equipment may be regarded
as suitable for use in this air cleanliness class.
Chapter 7 / 11
Details on cleanliness compatibility:
In order to be able to confirm cleanliness compatibility as
well as quantities reflecting clean-room compatibility that can
be detected by metrological methods, additional expert assess-
ments and parameters were included in the tests conducted
by the Fraunhofer Institute IPA. Cleanliness compatibility covers
a large number of sector-based cleanliness requirements
such as resistance to chemicals, surface quality, flow behaviour
or electrostatic charge characteristics. These are defined in the
following standards and codes of practice, among others:
Standardisation
General:
– classification of air cleanliness – clean-rooms and associated
controlled environments according to DIN EN ISO 14644-1
(Federal Standard 209 has been withdrawn)
– clean-room technology and clean-room compatibility of
equipment VDI 2083
– EHEDG (European Hygienic Engineering & Design Group)
Industrial application areas:

– GMP Guidelines (Good Manufacturing Practice) – pharma-
ceuticals
– FDA (Food and Drug Administration) – pharmaceuticals and
foodstuffs
– Medicinal Product Law
– EU Pharmaceutical Regulation – Good manufacturing practices
Volume 4 – (Medicinal products for human and veterinary use)
– Hazard Analytical Control Point (HACCP) Regulations – food-
stuffs
Hospital application areas:

– VDI 2167 Building services in hospitals
– DIN 1946-4 Ventilation and air conditioning Part 4 (Ventilation
in hospitals)
12 / Chapter 7
Airflow systems in clean-rooms:
One of the basic criteria for the requirements placed on equip-
ment in clean-rooms is the nature of the airflow system. The
CLEAN clean-room luminaire has been designed for use in all
clean-room classes with a turbulent mixed airflow. In this
commonly encountered airflow system, air enters the room
with a turbulent flow, thereby causing continuous dilution and
“cleaning”. According to GMP (Good Manufacturing Practice)
classification, clean-room Classes C to E and ISO Classes 6 to
9 can be achieved using this airflow system.
Clean-rooms with low-turbulence displacement flow, which

are more expensive to build, allow air to initially enter the clean-
room with low turbulence. The design of laminar flow clean-
rooms precludes the use of any luminaires other than extremely
slim batten luminaires which disrupt the directional flow of air
as little as possible. The laminar flow system minimises con-
tamination, and any contaminant is quickly eliminated. Clean-
rooms in ISO Classes 1 to 6 and GMP Classes A and B are
areas where this airflow system is used.
Chapter 7 / 13
Chemical effects on materials
No material is resistant to 2. Applications
all chemical influences. The following applications
The effects of chemicals vary are just a few examples of
widely and take up entire situations in which material
volumes of resistance tables. damage may occur:
The table on the opposite page – Chemical and petro-
can therefore only give a brief chemical industry
overview of effects of some – Foodstuffs industry (cheese
frequently occurring chemicals production, dairies, meat
and is subject to the following processing, breweries)
conditions: – Agriculture
– The chemical substance – Fishing industry
listed in the table is a basic – Kitchens and industrial
material and not part of a cooking facilities
chemical compound. – Car wash facilities
– The ambient temperature – Production facilities and
is 22 °C. workshops using a high
A great many complaints could level of oil and grease
be avoided if due consider-
ation were given during the 3. Chemical composition
planning stage to the situation The chemical composition
in which the luminaire is going should be discussed with
to be used. every operator.
What are the key factors? 4. Degree of saturation of

chemical substances
1. Luminaire materials
A luminaire consists of several 5. Ambient temperature
parts having different functions Depending on the type and
and which are therefore made composition of the substances,
from different materials (base chemical reactions will take
plate, cover, seal, closures, place over a range of tem-
cable inlets, etc.). peratures. We should be glad
to provide further advice if you
have any questions or doubts
about the resistance of any
materials.
14 / Chapter 7
Chemical sub- Stainless Alu- Poly- Polymeth- Poly-
stance in question steel minium ester acrylate..carbonate
Acetic acid up to 5 % • • • • •
Acetic acid up to 30 % • – • – •
Acetone • • – – –
Alcohol up to 30 % • • • • •
Alcohol, concentrated • • • – –
Aliphatic
hydrocarbons • • • • •
Ammonia 25 % • • – • –
Aniline • • – – –
Aromatic
hydrocarbons • • • – –
Battery acid • • • • •
Beer • • • • •
Benzene • • – – –
Blood • • • • •
Bromic acid • – – – –
Carbon dioxide • • • • •
Carbon monoxide • • • • •
Carbon tetrachloride • • • – –
Caustic soda solution 2 % • – • • –
Caustic soda solution 10 % • – – • –
Chloroform • • – – –
Chlorophenol • • – – –
Diesel oil, crude oil • • • • •
Dioxan • • • – –
Ether • • • – –
Ethyl acetate (ester) • • – – –
Glycerine • • • • •
Glycol • • • • •
Glysantin • • • • •
Hydrochloric acid
up to 20 % – – • • •
above 20 % – • • • •
Hydrogen peroxide
up to 40 % • • – – •
over 40 % • • – • •
• = resistant, • = resistant to limited extent, – = not resistant
Chapter 7 / 15
Chemical sub- Stainless Alu- Poly- Polymeth- Poly-
stance in question steel minium ester acrylate..carbonate
Ketones • • – – –
Lime milk • – • • •
Lysol • • – – –
Methylene chloride • • – – –
Methanol • • – – –
Metal salts and their
aqueous solutions • – • • •
Naphtha (cleaner’s naphtha) • • • • •
Petrolium ether • • • • •
Pyridine • • – – –
Phenol • • – – –
Nitric acid
up to 10 % • – • • •
up to 20 % • – • • •
above 20 % • • – – –
Sea water • • • • •
Soap-suds • • • • •
Soda • – • • •
Sodium chloride solution • • • • •
Sulphuretted hydrogen • • • • •
Sulphuric acid
up to 50 % – – • • •
up to 70 % – – • • •
above 70 % – – – – –
Sulphurous acid
up to 5 % • • • • –
Synthetic detergents • • • • •
Turpentine • • • • •
Water up to 60°C • • • • •
Xylene • • – – –
• = resistant, • = resistant to limited extent, – = not resistant
16 / Chapter 7
Short-circuit protection and loading of circuits
Miniature circuit breakers
Trip characteristic Rangeh
B over 3 ln to 5 ln
C over 5 ln to 10 ln
D over 10 ln to 20 ln
Maximum number of fluorescent lamps per

miniature circuit breaker
Number of fluorescent lamps with conventional or
low-loss ballast for different lamp circuits
C10 C16 B10 B16 B20
n.k./p.k. n.k./p.k. n.k./p.k. n.k./p.k. n.k./p.k.
1/18 W T26 44/53 73/86 27/32 43/51 53/63
1/36–38 W T26 38/53 63/86 23/32 37/51 46/63
1/58 W T26 25/34 40/56 15/20 24/33 30/41
1/5–7 W TC-S 83/135 136/221 50/81 80/130 100/162
1/9 W TC-S 93/135 153/221 56/81 90/130 112/162
1/11 W TC-S 104/135 170/221 63/81 100/130 125/162
1/10–13 W TC-D 72/122 119/200 44/74 70/118 87/147
1/18 W TC-D/-T 62/91 102/149 37/55 60/88 75/110
1/26 W TC-D/-T 43/68 71/112 26/41 42/66 52/82
1/18 W TC-L/-F 44/53 73/86 27/32 43/51 53/63
1/24 W TC-L/-F 41/53 68/86 25/32 40/51 50/63
1/36 W TC-L/-F 38/53 62/86 23/32 37/51 46/63
n. k. = no p.f. correction (inductive) p. k. = shunt p.f. correction
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for metal halide

lamps – Maximum recommended number of electronic
ballasts per automatic circuit breaker
Electronic ballasts for metal halide lamps, non-dimmable
(TRIDONIC.ATCO PCI series, except for PCI... A101/A201/A202)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2 mm2
1/20 W HI 30 40 50 60 15 20 25 30
1/35 W HI 30 40 50 60 15 20 25 30
2/35 W HI 14 25 36 42 8 14 18 18
1/70 W HI 14 25 36 42 8 14 18 18
2/70 W HI 7 14 20 20 4 6 7 7
1/100 W HI 10 18 26 30 6 10 13 13
1/150 W HI 7 14 20 20 4 6 7 7
Depending on type of unit, a larger number of units may be possible.
Chapter 7 / 17
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for electronic ballasts
for fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps – Maximum
recommended number of electronic ballasts per automatic
circuit breaker
Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, non-dimming
(TRIDONIC.ATCO PC T5 PRO lp series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
1x14/21/28/35 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29
2x14/21/28/35 W T16 18 24 28 34 9 12 14 17
3/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32
4/14 W T16 26 38 44 64 13 19 22 32
1/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29
2/24 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29
3/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14
4/24 W T16 14 18 22 28 7 9 11 14
1/39 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29
2/39 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18
1/49 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29
2/49 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 18
1/54 W T16 28 40 44 58 14 20 22 29
2/54 W T16 14 20 24 30 7 10 12 15
1/80 W T16 18 28 30 36 9 14 15 22
2/80 W T16 8 14 16 20 4 7 8 10
Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, non-dimming

(TRIDONIC.ATCO PC T8 PRO series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
1/18 W T26 44 62 74 104 22 31 37 52
2/18 W T26 36 50 60 72 18 25 30 36
3/18 W T26 40 60 80 92 20 30 40 46
4/18 W T26 30 40 52 64 15 20 26 32
1/30 W T26 40 52 60 72 19 26 30 36
2/30 W T26 22 30 38 42 11 15 19 21
1/36 W T26 38 52 60 72 19 26 30 36
2/36 W T26 24 32 38 44 12 16 19 22
3/36 W T26 18 24 32 40 9 12 16 20
1/58 W T26 36 50 60 70 18 25 30 35
2/58 W T26 16 22 26 30 8 11 13 15
1/70 W T26 36 50 60 70 18 25 30 35
2/70 W T26 16 22 26 30 8 11 13 15
18 / Chapter 7
Electronic ballasts for T16 fluorescent lamps, dimmable
(TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA T5 ECO/EXCEL one4all (lp) series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20

1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
1/14 W T16 50 80 150 180 25 40 75 90
2/14 W T16 38 54 78 92 19 27 39 46
3/14 W T16 16 26 34 42 8 13 17 21
4/14 W T16 16 24 34 38 8 12 17 19
1/21 W T16 50 80 120 150 25 40 60 75
2/21 W T16 30 40 60 64 15 20 30 32
1/28 W T16 38 54 78 92 19 27 39 46
2/28 W T16 24 34 48 52 12 17 24 26
1/35 W T16 34 50 76 86 17 25 38 43
2/35 W T16 16 22 30 32 8 11 15 16
1/24 W T16 50 80 150 180 25 40 75 90
2/24 W T16 24 34 48 52 12 17 24 26
1/39 W T16 34 50 70 86 17 25 38 43
2/39 W T16 16 22 30 32 8 11 15 16
1/49 W T16 24 34 48 52 12 17 24 26
2/49 W T16 12 18 26 26 6 9 13 13
1/54 W T16 24 34 48 52 12 17 24 26
2/54 W T16 12 18 26 26 6 9 13 13
1/80 W T16 14 20 28 28 7 10 14 14
2/80 W T16 10 14 20 22 5 7 10 11
Electronic ballasts for T26 fluorescent lamps, dimmable

(TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA T8 ECO/EXCEL one4all series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20

1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
1/18 W T26 30 50 76 80 15 25 38 40
2/18 W T26 20 30 40 46 10 15 20 23
3/18 W T26 16 18 24 30 8 9 12 15
4/18 W T26 12 16 24 28 6 8 12 14
1/30 W T26 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/30 W T26 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
1/36 W T26 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/36 W T26 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
1/38 W T26 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/38 W T26 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
1/58 W T26 20 30 40 46 10 15 20 23
2/58 W T26 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
Chapter 7 / 19
Electronic ballasts for TC-L fluorescent lamps, non-dimmable
(TRIDONIC.ATCO PC TCL PRO series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
1/18 W TC-L 30 40 48 60 15 20 24 30
2/18 W TC-L 24 32 38 46 12 16 19 23
1/24 W TC-L 30 40 48 60 15 20 24 30
2/24 W TC-L 24 32 38 46 12 16 19 23
1/36 W TC-L 38 54 76 90 19 27 38 45
2/36 W TC-L 24 34 44 50 12 17 22 25
1/40 W TC-L 38 54 78 90 19 27 39 45
2/40 W TC-L 14 24 28 34 7 12 14 17
1/55 W TC-L 28 38 50 60 14 19 25 30
2/55 W TC-L 8 14 18 20 4 7 9 10
Electronic ballasts for TC-L compact fluorescent lamps,

Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA TCL ECO/
EXCEL one4all series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
2/18 W TC-L 10 12 16 20 5 6 8 10
2/24 W TC-L 16 20 24 30 8 10 12 15
1/36 W TC-L 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/36 W TC-L 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
1/40 W TC-L 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/40 W TC-L 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
1/55 W TC-L 20 30 40 46 10 15 20 23
2/55 W TC-L 10 14 18 20 5 7 9 10
1/80 W TC-L 10 20 30 30 5 10 15 15
20 / Chapter 7
Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL fluorescent lamps, non-
dimmable (TRIDONIC.ATCO PC PRO series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20
1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
1/9 W TC-SEL 48 72 80 100 24 36 40 50
2/9 W TC-SEL 32 44 54 64 16 22 27 32
1/10 W TC-DEL 46 70 78 98 23 35 39 49
2/10 W TC-DEL 32 44 52 60 16 22 26 30
1/11 W TC-SEL 48 72 80 100 24 36 40 50
2/11 W TC-SEL 32 44 54 64 16 22 27 32
1/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 46 70 78 98 23 35 39 49
2/13 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 32 44 52 60 16 22 26 30
1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 48 72 80 100 24 36 40 50
2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 48 72 80 100 24 36 40 50
1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 34 46 74 84 17 23 37 42
2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 22 32 38 44 11 16 19 22
1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 34 46 74 84 17 23 37 42
2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 22/14 32/18 38/22 44/30 11/7 16/9 19/11 22/15
1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 34 46 74 84 17 23 37 42
2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 14 18 22 30 7 9 11 15
Electronic ballasts for TC-DEL/TEL compact fluorescent

lamps, Basic dimming/Dali dimming (TRIDONIC.ATCO PCA
TCD/TCT ECO/EXCEL one4all series)
C10 C13 C16 C20 B10 B13 B16 B20

1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5
1/11 W TC-SEL 40 60 80 80 20 30 40 40
2/11 W TC-SEL 28 40 60 64 14 20 30 32
1/13 W TC-DEL 40 60 80 80 20 30 40 40
2/13 W TC-DEL 28 40 60 64 14 20 30 32
1/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/18 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 22 32 46 68 11 15 23 34
1/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 30 50 70 76 15 25 35 38
2/26 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 22 32 46 56 11 16 23 28
1/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 26 38 50 58 13 19 25 29
2/32 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 10 18 24 28 5 9 12 14
1/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 26 38 50 58 13 19 25 29
2/42 W TC-DEL/TC-TEL 12 18 24 28 6 9 12 14
1/57 W TC-TEL 12 16 22 26 6 8 11 13
Chapter 7 / 21
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for high-pressure
lamps – Maximum recommended number of ballasts per
automatic circuit breaker
Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps,
uncompensated
Lamp values Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker

W A C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25
35 0.53 11 18 23 29 9 15 18 23
70 0.98 7 11 14 17 5 8 9 12
150 1.8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 6
250 3 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
400 3.5* 2 3 4 5 1 2 2 3
400 4.4** 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2
* with OGLI 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 3.5 A
** with OGLS 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 4.4 A
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour

lamps, uncompensated
W A C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25
50 0.77 9 14 18 22 6 10 13 16
70 1 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 12
100 1.2 6 9 11 14 4 6 8 10
150 1.8 4 6 7 9 2 4 5 7
250 3 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
400 4.4 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 2
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour

lamps, uncompensated
W A C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25
50 0.6 10 15 18 23 8 13 16 20
80 0.8 6 9 11 14 6 10 12 15
125 1.15 4 7 7 9 4 7 9 10
250 2.15 2 3 3 4 2 3 4 5
400 3.25 1 2 2 2 1 2 3 3
700 5.4 – 1 1 1 – 1 1 1
22 / Chapter 7
Conventional ballasts for metal halide lamps, compensated
Lamp Com- Number of ballasts per automatic circuit breaker

values pen-
W A sation C10 C16 C20 C25 B10 B16 B20 B25
35 0.53 6 22 36 45 50 11 18 23 27
70 0.98 12 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 20
150 1.8 20 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 12
250 3 32 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 8
400 3.5* 35 3 5 7 8 2 4 5 6
400 4.4** 45 3 4 5 7 2 3 4 5
* with OGLI 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 3.5 A
** with OGLS 400 ... ballast and lamp current of approx. 4.4 A
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure sodium vapour

lamps, compensated

values pen-
50 0.77 10 16 24 31 38 11 17 22 27
70 1 12 12 18 23 29 8 13 16 20
100 1.2 12 10 16 20 25 7 11 14 17
150 1.8 20 7 11 14 17 5 8 10 12
250 3 36 5 7 9 11 3 5 6 8
400 4.4 45 3 4 5 7 2 3 4 5
Conventional ballasts for high-pressure mercury vapour

lamps, compensated
values pen-
50 0.6 7 19 31 39 49 10 15 18 23
80 0.8 8 12 19 24 30 6 9 11 14
125 1.15 10 7 12 15 19 4 6 7 9
250 2.15 18 4 6 7 9 2 3 3 4
400 3.25 25 2 4 5 6 1 2 2 2
700 5.4 40 1 2 2 3 – 1 1 1
All data refer to a rated voltage of 230 V 50 Hz.
Chapter 7 / 23
Loading of automatic circuit breakers for low-voltage
halogen incandescent lamps – Maximum recommended
number of transformers per automatic circuit breaker
Magnetic transformers for QT/QR/QR-CB(C) halogen
incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO TMBx/OMTx series)
Power C10 C16 B10 B16
20 W 58 93 29 46
35 W 41 65 20 32
50 W 21 35 10 17
70 W 15 24 7 12
80 W 14 22 7 11
105 W 8 13 4 6
150 W 4 6 2 3
210 W 2–3 4–5 1 2
300 W 1–2 2–3 n.r. 1
n.r. = not recommended

incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO TMAx/TMDx series)

20 W 42 67 21 33
35 W 35 56 17 28
40 W 26 43 13 21
50 W 23 37 11 18
60 W 21 33 10 16
70 W 16 26 8 13
80 W 13 21 6 10
105 W 9 14 4 7

incandescent lamps (TRIDONIC.ATCO OGT series)

250 W 3–4 5–6 1–2 2–3
300 W 2 3–4 1 1–2
500 W 1 1–2 n.r. n.r.
n.r. = not recommended
Because of the high starting current of halogen incandescent lamps, we recommend to

use automatic circuit breakers with C characteristics.
24 / Chapter 7
Low-voltage installation
Service life and luminous flux
The service life and luminous flux of low-voltage halogen lamps
are extremely voltage dependent. Voltage changes on the line
side are transferred to the secondary side in the same ratio.
50 7 A 1 V overvoltage
is insignificant for
Multiplication factor for relative operating values
30 6
20
5 a 230 W halogen
Lh 4 lamp. For a 12 V
10 ǩ
8 3 halogen lamp,
6 however, this
4 2 represents an
overvoltage of
2 8 % which re-
1= 1 = duces the average
100% 100%
0.8
0.8 service life of the
0.7
0.6 halogen lamp, e.g.
0.4
0.6 from 3,000 hours
0.3
0.5 to approx. 1,200
0.2
0.4 hours.
0.3 0.1
0.08
0.06
0.2 0.04
ǩ Lh 0.03 ǩ = luminous flux
0.15 0.02 Lh = service life
60 % 80 % 100 % 120 % 140 %
Voltage as % of nominal voltage
Operation at rated load

Magnetic transformers should be operated at rated load as far as
possible so as to avoid any rise in the secondary voltage which
can result in a reduction in lamp service life (5 % overvoltage
corresponds to 30 % shorter life).
Conductor cross-sections and voltage drop

Because the voltages are small, large currents flow on the
secondary side. If conductors are long and have small cross-
sections, this can result in considerable voltage drops. Cross-
sections must be chosen so that the voltage drop across the
conductor between transformer and lamp does not exceed 5 %.
Chapter 7 / 25
Required conductor cross-sections in mm2 as a function of
transformer rating and cable length (one-way line length) for
magnetic transformers:
Trans- Cable length in m

former
rating up to 2 m up to 4 m up to 6 m up to 8 m up to 10 m up to 12 m
20 VA 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
50 VA 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.5 2.5 4
1OO VA 1.5 2.5 4 4 6 6
150 VA 2.5 4 6 6 10 10
200 VA 4 4 6 10 10 16
Installation
The distance between transformer and lamps must be as short
as possible (minimum distance, however, is approx. 30 cm) in
order to avoid the relatively large conductor cross-sections.
On the other hand, there is often unwanted humming, especially
when lighting is adjusted; therefore the transformer must be
installed out of earshot if possible.
Trans-
former
Wherever possible, cables must be laid in a star configuration

and be of equal length to ensure that all lamps receive the same
voltage.
26 / Chapter 7
Transformers and light regulation
Only approved safety transformers should be used. The ambient
temperature must not exceed 50 °C max. Please note that trans-
formers for use in areas which present fire risks must carry the
appropriate conformity mark (e.g. , , , ).
Phase control
Halogen lamps are operated with a magnetic transformer.
Reverse phase control

Halogen lamps are operated with an electronic transformer in
the high-frequency range. Important: do not exceed maximum
conductor length.
Safety measures when operating low-voltage

halogen lamps
Low-voltage halogen lamps generate a huge amount of heat.
In the case of recessed luminaires, make sure there is adequate
heat removal and that the safety distances from combustible
materials are observed.
The necessary safety distances from the illuminated surface
also apply when using spotlights. These are identified by the
following symbol and details of the relevant distance in metres:
…m
Chapter 7 / 27
Chapter 8
Checklists
The five steps of lighting design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 – 11

Checklist according to the five steps of lighting
design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 – 11
Maintenance of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 – 19
Environmental conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lamp lumens maintenance factor (LLMF)
and lamp survival factor (LSF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 – 17
Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF) . . . . . . 18
Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF) . . . 19
Economic efficiency calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 – 23
Economic analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 – 22
Table of burning hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Refurbishment of lighting systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 – 28
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment . . . . . 27 – 28
Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 – 33
The five steps of lighting design
= help for structuring the lighting design scheme
– Determine lighting REQUIREMENTS

– SELECT lamps, luminaires and lighting
management
– Calculate NUMBER of luminaires required
– POSITION luminaires and lighting control
– ANALYSE the results
From experience we know that usually Step 1 = Determine

lighting requirements is not taken into account sufficiently. The
checklist below should help the user to consider key questions
for clarifying basic requirements. Accordingly, requirements are
broken down as follows:
– General conditions
– Lighting quality requirements
– visual performance
– vista
– visual comfort
– vitality
– empowerment
The lighting quality criteria are in line with those set by the EU.
ELI (Ergonomic Lighting Indicator) was developed in collaboration
with ETH Zurich and TU Ilmenau (Prof. Dr. Schierz).
Understanding this task will allow for proper development of a

well thought-out lighting solution based on the quality character-
istics of lighting (Chapter 1) and project-specific requirements.
Analysis includes the assessment of lighting quality. In the process,

the requirement criteria are taken into account. The formulations
for assessment differ from the requirements (ELI assessment).
A checklist for workplace analysis (page 11) is provided for easy

identification of technical lighting equipment at workplaces, in
particular DSE workstations.
Chapter 8 / 3
Checklist according to the five steps of lighting
design
1. Lighting requirements Checked ✓
General conditions
Utilization of room
Size and height of room
Ceiling structure
Reflection factors
Window areas
Doors, passageways, circulation areas
Multi-task areas
Arrangement and material of furniture
Protection types (foreign bodies and humidity)
Protection classes (electrical installations)
Influence by chemicals
Fire protection
Emergency lighting
Energy consumption limits (kWh/year)
Maximum power requirement (W/m²)
Budget for initial installation
Lighting quality requirements (ELI requirements)

Criterion A – Visual performance
How well should the visual task be recognised?
Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring
that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out.
Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact
on visual task performance.
At the workstations, …
-2 -1 0* 1 2
... standard visual tasks have to be performed.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... visual tasks are the same across the
whole area.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... colour distinction is required to a common extent.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... no extraordinary changes of viewing direction occur.
4 / Chapter 8
Within the visual task area, …
-2 -1 0 1 2
... hard shadows must be avoided.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... the field of vision should be free from sources of glare.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... reflections must be avoided.
* Minimum criterion, corresponds to values Mean value
specified in the standards Visual task
Criterion B – Vista
How do you want to experience the lighting solution in your environment?
Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing
but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a
favourable first visual impression of a room.
In the project planned, ...

1 2 3 4 5
... the lighting concept should blend in smoothly
with the interior design.
1 2 3 4 5
... the lighting concept should be properly geared
towards expectations.
1 2 3 4 5
... the lighting concept should facilitate orientation
in the room.
1 2 3 4 5
... the first visual impression will be decisive.
1 2 3 4 5
... the perceptible quality of the luminaire will be
of major importance.
1 2 3 4 5
... the cleanliness of the room and the lighting
will be of major importance.
1 = does not apply at all; 5 = applies completely Mean value
Vista
Criterion C – Visual comfort

How much visual comfort is required in the room?
Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception
in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting
balance.

-2 -1 0 * 1 2
... users must be particularly protected from
annoying sources of glare.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... it will be particularly important to identify
three-dimensional structures in the room.

-2 -1 0 1 2
... the room should provide a bright and
inviting impression.
Chapter 8 / 5
-2 -1 0 1 2
... daylight must be taken into account.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... there must be no flickering light.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... larger dark areas should be avoided.
-2 -1 0 1 2
In the area around the visual task, the room
should be illuminated uniformly.
specified in the standards Visual comfort
Criterion D – Vitality
How positive should the light’s influence be on people?
Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being.
Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence
biological processes.
The lighting concept…

1 2 3 4 5
... should make people feel good.
1 2 3 4 5
... should stimulate people.
1 2 3 4 5
... it should be possible in particular to adjust the
lighting to the brightness level required.
1 2 3 4 5
... the effect to be created should be as natural
as possible.
1 2 3 4 5
... people’s circadian rhythm should be
particularly taken into account.
1 2 3 4 5
In the project planned, special emphasis is put
on protection against sources of annoyance or
adverse health effects.
Vitality
Criterion E – Empowerment
To what extent should the lighting adjust to my personal requirements?
Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for options
to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors and control systems help
users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.

1 2 3 4 5
... the user should be able to personally influence the
lighting situation.
1 2 3 4 5
... a variety of tasks must be taken into account.
1 2 3 4 5
The lighting should be switched automatically.
1 2 3 4 5
The artificial lighting should be controlled by daylight sensors.
6 / Chapter 8
1 2 3 4 5
The lighting should be controlled on the basis of time.
1 2 3 4 5
Any future layout changes should be taken into account.
Empowerment
ELI – LENI requirements

Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines
of the spider chart.
Visual performance
A
2
0
5
E 4
3 -1 5B
Empowerment 2 4 Vista
1 -2 3
2
1 1
2 -2
-1
3
0
4
1
5
2
D C
ELI
60 120
0 180
kWh/m2 a
LENI
Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19
Chapter 8 / 7
2. Selection of lamps, luminaires and
lighting management
Checked ✓
Lamp type
Luminaire range and model
Lighting management range and modules
3. Calculate number of luminaires required
Rough calculation (Quickplan/Quickcalc)

Detailed calculation (Dialux/Relux)
Planning conditions (maintenance, reflection)
4. Positioning of luminaires and lighting control
Positioning the luminaires

– structural situation
– orientation (avoid reflections and glare)
– spacings between luminaires (regular patterns)
– peripheries
– alignment
techn. infrastructure (distribution cabinet,
clamping compartment, …)
Position of control gear
Emergency lighting
5. Analysis of results
Lighting quality analysis (ELI assessment)

Criterion A – Visual performance
How well can the visual task be recognised?
Explanation: Lighting in conformity with relevant standards is decisive for ensuring
that the visual task can be identified and the related activities can be carried out.
Consideration of the traditional quality characteristics of lighting has a major impact
on visual task performance.
In the main visual task area, the lighting …

-2 -1 0 * 1 2
... complies with the maintenance value of illuminance.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... provides uniformity of illuminance.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... complies with the colour rendition index.
8 / Chapter 8
-2 -1 0 1 2
In the area around the visual task, the illuminance
level required is achieved.
In the lighting installation as it exists at present, …
-2 -1 0 1 2
... annoying hard shadows,
-2 -1 0 1 2
... irritating direct glare
-2 -1 0 1 2
... and annoying reflections are avoided.
specified in the standards Visual task
Please note: EN 12464 specifies standard values; values may be lower only if visual
tasks are modified. Where there are several task areas, calculate and assess the
mean value for all of them.
Criterion B – Vista
How do you experience the lighting solution in your environment?
Explanation: In prestigious buildings, for example, light is not only needed for seeing
but also enhances the looks of the interior. Light can provide guidance and create a
favourable first visual impression of a room.
The lighting concept …

1 2 3 4 5
... enhances interior design features.
1 2 3 4 5
... fulfils my personal expectations.
1 2 3 4 5
... takes passageways, circulation areas and
activity zones into consideration.
1 2 3 4 5
... creates a hierarchy of perception
(lighting focuses).
1 2 3 4 5
The luminaires make a high-quality
impression.
1 2 3 4 5
The luminaires are neither soiled nor affected
by other foreign substances.
Vista
Criterion C – Visual comfort

How much visual comfort is provided in the room?
Explanation: Light is needed not only in the visual task area, but also for perception
in the room. Rooms should be illuminated with uniform brightness and lighting
balance.
-2 -1 0 * 1 2
The lighting solution produces no glare (UGR).
-2 -1 0 1 2
The lighting components are balanced and
matched to the room.

-2 -1 0 1 2
The ceiling and walls are pleasantly bright.
Chapter 8 / 9
The lighting solution …
-2 -1 0 1 2
... takes daylight into account and uses it.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... does not flicker.
-2 -1 0 1 2
... does not allow major dark areas in the room.
-2 -1 0 1 2
The task area environment is uniformly
illuminated.
specified in the standards Visual comfort
Criterion D – Vitality
How positive is the light’s influence on the people?
Explanation: Light significantly influences people’s activity and sense of well-being.
Moreover, it has a positive impact on their health and may even enhance or influence
biological processes.
The lighting …
1 2 3 4 5
... is one of the factors that make me feel good.
1 2 3 4 5
... has a stimulating effect.
1 2 3 4 5
... adjusts to the brightness level required.
1 2 3 4 5
The lighting creates a natural, pleasant effect.
1 2 3 4 5
The lighting stabilises/enhances the users’
circadian rhythm.
1 2 3 4 5
There are no sources of annoyance or
adverse health effects.
Vitality
Criterion E – Empowerment
To what extent does the lighting adjust to my personal requirements?
Explanation: Varying visual requirements, visual tasks or periods of use call for
options to individually influence one’s lighting situation. Sensors and control systems
help users adjust the lighting situation to their personal needs.
1 2 3 4 5
The installation can be switched or dimmed.
1 2 3 4 5
A variety of lighting scenes can be called up.
1 2 3 4 5
Presence detectors make sure that the lighting
switches automatically.
1 2 3 4 5
Thanks to daylight sensors, the artificial lighting
adjusts to daylight changes over the course
of the day.
1 2 3 4 5
Automated, dynamic scenes are available.
10 / Chapter 8
1 2 3 4 5
Luminaires and switches can be rearranged flexibly.
1 2 3 4 5
The luminaires are arranged so as to allow for flexible
change in room utilisation without major effort.
Empowerment
ELI – LENI assessments

Application: the mean values of the individual criteria are entered on the centre lines
of the spider chart.
Visual performance
A
2
0
5
E 4
3 -1 5B
Empowerment 2 4 Vista
1 -2 3
2
1 1
2 -2
-1
3
0
4
1
5
2
D C
ELI
60 120
0 180
kWh/m2 a
LENI
Calculation see Chapter 1 / 19
Other analyses
Situation regarding standards
Economic efficiency
Budget
Documentation
Methods of presentation
Chapter 8 / 11
Maintenance of lighting systems
Today, the maintenance of lighting installations is a decisive
factor in an installation’s balance of costs. According to the
formula below (1), a lighting level required of Em = 500 lx at
a standard maintenance factor of MF = 0.67 implies a new
illuminance level of Enew = 750 lx.
Em: maintained illuminance = maintenance value of illuminance
(1) Em = Enew x MF (maintenance factor)
Benefit of a high MF: Benefit of a low MF:

– lower luminaire investment – low maintenance costs
costs – longer maintenance
– reduced energy costs intervals
Please note: at a lower maintenance factor, illuminance may

be constantly dimmed to the maintenance value to save energy
(maintenance control).
The maintenance factor includes 4 components:
(2) MF = LLMF x LSF x LMF x RMF
All these factors describe the decrease in illuminance. The

maximum in each case is 1, corresponding to the new value.
At the respective time of maintenance, the various causes of
the decrease in illuminance must be identified.
Maintenance factor components Causes of illuminance decrease

Lamp luminous flux mainten. factor LLMF Ageing of lamps
Lamp survival factor LSF Failure of lamps
Luminaire maintenance factor LMF Soiling of luminaire
Room maintenance factor RMF Soiling of room
Options for improving the maintenance factor:

– Lamp replacement already before the lamp service life ends
(LLWF/LSF )
➝
– Immediate replacement of lamps in case of failure (LSF = 1)

– Use of closed luminaires (LWF7 )
➝
– More frequent room cleaning (RWF7 )

➝
12 / Chapter 8
160 %
140 %
120 %
100 %
80 % Example:
Luminaire maintenance: every year
60 % Room surface maintenance: every 3 years
Lamp replacement: every 3 years = Enew
40 %
Faulty lamp replacement: immediately = Em
20 %
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5
years
Environmental conditions
In case you are not familiar with the application, the following
standard values apply; however, the tables below will help you cal-
culate the accurate maintenance factor according to formula (2).
Ambient Maintenance Working Reference

condition interval areas maintenance
recommended factor
Very Clean 3 years Clean-rooms, data 0.80
centres, assembly
workstations for
electronic
components
Clean 3 years Offices, schools 0.67
Normal 2 years Shops, laborato- 0.57
ries, restaurants,
warehouses,
assembly bays
Soiled 1 year Steel works, 0.50
chemical plants,
foundries,
welding shops,
grinding shops,
wood processing
According to CIE – volume 97, “Maintenance of indoor electric
lighting systems”, at 2005
Chapter 8 / 13
Lamps Burning hours
100 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 24,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000
Incandescent lamp LLMF 1.00 0.97 0.93
CIE97:2005 LSF 1.00 0.98 0.50
14 / Chapter 8
Halogen incandescent lamp LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.97 0.95
CIE97:2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 0.78 0.50
T26 (low-loss ballast) single-band LLMF 1.00 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.82 0.78 0.76 0.73 0.72
fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.78 0.60
T26 (low-loss ballast) triple-band LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91
fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.83 0.60
T26 (electronic ballast) triple-band LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90
fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005/CIE97:2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.90 0.75 0.50
T26 (el. ball.) triple-band fluor. lamp, long-life LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90
Philips MASTER TL-D Xtreme (long life) LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.70
AURA Ultimate LL (long life) LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99
T16 (electronic ballast) triple-band LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89
fluorescent lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.80 0.50
AURA SUPREME T5 HO LL (long life) LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98

Compact fluorescent lamp LLMF 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.91 0.89 0.87 0.85
CIE97:2005 LSF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.86 0.50
TC-S, TC-D, TC-T 5-26W (low-loss ballast) LLMF 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78
Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.81 0.60
TC-SEL, TC-TEL 5-42W (electronic ballast) LLMF 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.93 0.87 0.84 0.82 0.80 0.79
Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.93 0.76 0.55
TC-DEL 10-26W (electronic ballast) LLMF 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.85 0.82 0.80 0.79 0.78
Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.80 0.60
TC-L 18-36W (low-loss ballast) LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.92 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88
Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.95 0.86 0.62
TC-L 18-80W (electronic ballast) LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.93 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.89
Compact fluor. lamp ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.90 0.75 0.50
Induction lamp LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.88 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.85 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.75
Philips QL LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.94
and lamp survival factor (LSF)
Values acc. to specifications by lamp manufacturers, January 2008, acc. to CIE97:2005

Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition, and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge
lamps for lighting” of November 2005. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types, please contact the respective manufacturer directly.
The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival.
Chapter 8 / 15
Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc. to IEC (2.75 h ON, 0.25 h OFF).
Lamps Burning hours
100 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 4,000 6,000 8,000 10,000 12,000 14,000 16,000 18,000 20,000 22,000 24,000 30,000 35,000 40,000 45,000
Metal halide lamp Ceramic (50-150W) LLMF 1.00 0.95 0.87 0.75 0.72 0.68 0.64 0.60 0.56
CIE97:2005 LSF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.95 0.80 0.50
16 / Chapter 8
Metal halide lamp Ceramic LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.85 0.81 0.80
Philips CDM-T 70W/Elite LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.98 0.90 0.50
Osram HCI-T 150W/WDL PB LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.88 0.70
Osram HCI 250W PB LSF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.94 0.90 0.85 0.75 0.62
Metal halide lamp Quartz (250/400W) LLMF 1.00 0.98 0.95 0.90 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.65 0.63 0.60 0.56 0.53 0.50
CIE97:2005 LSF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.92 0.86 0.80 0.73 0.68 0.63 0.55 0.50
Metal halide lamp Quartz LLMF 0.99 0.98 0.92 0.88 0.85 0.80 0.75 0.70 0.69 0.65
Osram HQI-E 250W/D LSF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61
Osram HQI-E 400W/D LSF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61
Osram HQI-BT 400W/N LSF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.95 0.91 0.86 0.79 0.70 0.61
Metal halide lamp Quartz LLMF 1.00 0.98 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.86 0.83 0.80 0.78 0.76 0.74 0.73 0.72 0.71
Philips HPI-T Plus 250/400W LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.84 0.75 0.66 0.59 0.50

High-pressure mercury-vapour lamp LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.91 0.87 0.83 0.81 0.79 0.77 0.75
50–1,000W ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.94 0.91 0.84 0.77 0.63 0.50
Mercury vapour lamp LLMF 1.00 0.98 0.94 0.91 0.87 0.80 0.77 0.75 0.73 0.72 0.71 0.70
Philips HPL-N 50-400W LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.88 0.83 0.72 0.50
Sodium vapour lamp 50/70W LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87 0.87 0.86 0.85
ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.89 0.84 0.79 0.72 0.63 0.50
Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.89 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.88 0.87 0.87
(standard luminous flux)
ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.90 0.88 0.84 0.79 0.70
Sodium vapour lamp 150–400W LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.91 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90
(higher luminous flux)
ZVEI 2005 LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.90 0.86 0.81 0.73
Sodium vapour lamp LLMF 1.00 0.99 0.99 0.98 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.93 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.90 0.89
Philips SON(-T) PIA Plus 100–400W LSF 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 1.00 0.99 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.93 0.92 0.88 0.86 0.82 0.77 0.55 0.43
and lamp survival factor (LSF)
Values acc. to specifications by lamp manufacturers, January 2008, acc. to CIE97:2005

Technical report “Guide on the Maintenance of Indoor Electric Lighting Systems” 2nd edition, and ZVEI publication “Service life behaviour of discharge
lamps for lighting” of November 2005. For data of lamps by other manufacturers or other lamp types, please contact the respective manufacturer directly.
The use of state-of-the-art ballast technology is a prerequisite. The switching frequency has a major influence on lamp survival.
Chapter 8 / 17
Most data are based on the standardised 3-hour switching rhythm acc. to IEC (2.75 h ON, 0.25 h OFF).
Luminaire cleaning
interval in years 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0
Environment type SS S N V SS S N V SS S N V SS S N V SS S N V SS S N V
Luminaire type
18 / Chapter 8
Bare batten luminaires 0.98 0.95 0.92 0.88 0.96 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.95 0.91 0.87 0.80 0.94 0.89 0.84 0.78 0.93 0.87 0.82 0.75 0.92 0.85 0.79 0.73
Reflector exposed above 0.96 0.95 0.91 0.88 0.95 0.90 0.86 0.83 0.94 0.87 0.83 0.79 0.92 0.84 0.80 0.75 0.91 0.82 0.76 0.71 0.89 0.79 0.74 0.68
(self-cleaning effect)
Reflector enclosed above 0.95 0.93 0.89 0.83 0.94 0.89 0.81 0.72 0.93 0.84 0.74 0.64 0.91 0.80 0.69 0.59 0.89 0.77 0.64 0.54 0.87 0.74 0.61 0.52
(no self-cleaning effect)
Enclosed IP2X 0.94 0.92 0.87 0.83 0.94 0.88 0.82 0.77 0.93 0.85 0.79 0.73 0.91 0.83 0.77 0.71 0.90 0.81 0.75 0.68 0.89 0.79 0.73 0.65
Dust-proof IP5X 0.94 0.96 0.93 0.91 0.96 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.92 0.92 0.88 0.83 0.93 0.91 0.86 0.81 0.92 0.90 0.85 0.80 0.92 0.90 0.84 0.79
Indirect luminaires 0.94 0.92 0.89 0.85 0.93 0.86 0.81 0.74 0.91 0.81 0.73 0.65 0.77 0.88 0.66 0.57 0.86 0.73 0.60 0.51 0.85 0.70 0.55 0.45
From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”, dated 2005, ISBN 3 900 734 34 8
Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber), S = clean (sauber), N = normal, V = soiled (verschmutzt)
Table for luminaire maintenance factor (LMF)

Room cleaning
interval in years 0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0
Illumina- Environment
tion type type
Direct SS 1.00 0.98 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97 0.97
S 1.00 0.96 0.95 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94
N 1.00 0.92 0.91 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90 0.90
V 1.00 0.87 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86 0.86
Direct/ SS 1.00 0.97 0.96 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95 0.95
Indirect S 1.00 0.93 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91 0.91
N 1.00 0.87 0.84 0.84 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83 0.83
V 1.00 0.77 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75 0.75
Indirect SS 1.00 0.95 0.93 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92 0.92
S 1.00 0.89 0.86 0.85 0.85 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84 0.84
N 1.00 0.77 0.73 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72 0.72
V 1.00 0.60 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55
From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”, dated 2005, ISBN 3 900 734 34 8
The figures in the table above apply to reflection factors 70/50/20 and a medium-sized room (k = 2.5)
Ambient conditions: SS = very clean (sehr sauber), S = clean (sauber), N = normal, V = soiled (verschmutzt)
Chapter 8 / 19
Table for room surface maintenance factor (RSMF)
Economic efficiency calculation
A short pay-back period is usually the most important consider-
ation when designing lighting systems.
The pay-back period calculation using the following forms
is based on a static calculation method. This is a theoretical
approach that delivers a guide value very quickly and is perfectly
adequate for an initial estimate.
Dynamic calculation models involving depreciation and interest
payments are left to the financial experts and fall outside the
scope of this handbook.
Static calculation model
Extra expenditure investment costs
Pay-back time =
Annual saving in operating costs
Definition of terms used in the economic analysis sheets

(3) System power of luminaire Lamp wattage + power dissi-
pation in control gear.
(5) Annual burning hours Total of the daily lamp ON hours over
the year. The table of burning hours (Chap. 8/25) provides help
for daylight-based systems.
(9) Maintenance factor A reference maintenance factor of
0.67 can be assumed (3-year maintenance interval, clean
environment), e.g. office; see Chap. 8/15).
The maintenance value can be determined precisely on
the basis of the details included in the previous chapter
“Maintenance of lighting installations”. The lighting calculation
cannot be made until the maintenance factor has been deter-
mined. The maintenance factor plus the general conditions
have to be documented in the design process.
(14) Cost of lamp replacement Cost of the complete job of
replacing the lamps, including the costs of the lamp and
additional costs such as step ladders, weekend overtime
payments or loss of production.
(15) Cost of luminaire cleaning Cost of the complete job of
cleaning the luminaire plus replacing faulty components in
the lighting system including parts costs.
(16) Cost of room cleaning Labour costs for cleaning room
surfaces and restoring the reflection characteristics to their
new condition.
(17) Energy costs per kWh Estimate a mixed price for high and
low tariff. Include energy standing charges in the working price.
20 / Chapter 8
Economic analysis
Building project
Option 1 Option 2
Luminaire type (1)
Luminaire data
Number of lamps per luminaire (2)
System power of luminaire (W) (3)
Operating data
Service life of system (y) (4)
Annual burning hours see Chap. 8/25 (5)
Lamp replacement interval (y) (6)
Luminaire cleaning interval (y) (7)
Room cleaning interval (y) (8)
Number of luminaires
Maintenance factor (9)
Number of luminaires (10)
Itemised investment costs

Cost of one luminaire (11)
Cost of one lamp (12)
Installation costs per luminaire (13)

Chapter 8 / 21
Option 1 Option 2
Itemised operating costs

Cost of lamp replacement (14)
Cost of luminaire cleaning (15)
Cost of room cleaning (16)
Energy costs per kWh (17)
Investment costs
Luminaire costs (10) x (11) (18)
Lamp costs (10) x (2) x (12) (19)
Installation costs (10) x (13) (20)
Investment costs (18) + (19) + (20) (21)
Operating costs
Lamp replacement costs (14) x (4) Ⲑ (6) (22)
Luminaire cleaning costs (15) x (4) Ⲑ (7) (23)
Room cleaning costs (16) x (4) Ⲑ (8) (24)
Energy costs (10) x (3) x (4) x (5) x (17) ⫼ 1000 (25)
Operating costs (22) + (23) + (24) + (25) (26)
Annual operating costs (26) ⫼ (4) (27)
(21) Option 2 – (21) Option 1

Pay-back period* = = years
(27) Option 1 – (27) Option 2
–
Pay-back period* = = years
–
* excludes depreciation and interest
22 / Chapter 8
Working mode/shift type On period Daylight-based control Burning hours per lamp and year
Days in use/year Hours/day in hours
24-h shift working, 365 24 No 8,760
Process monitoring/control 365 24 Yes 7,300
Double shift, 310 16 No 4,960
6 days/week 310 16 Yes 3,720
Single shift, 310 10 No 3,100
6 days/week 310 10 Yes 1,760
Table of burning hours
Single shift, 258 10 No 2,580

5 days/week 258 10 Yes 1,550
Daylight-based control: the lamps switch on automatically when there is too little daylight available.
Data is based on the assumption that there is sufficient available daylight for half the year.
From CIE publication 97 “Maintenance of indoor electric lighting systems”, dated 2005
Chapter 8 / 23
Refurbishment of lighting systems
The following list provides clues for discussion with the cus-
tomer. The potentialities stated draw a comparison between
contemporary lighting solution options available today with the
technology approx. 15 years ago. In a project, viable savings
must be accurately calculated in the design stage.
The savings apply only on a case-by-case basis. If several

measures are taken, they will complement each other without
the levels adding up.
1. Saving energy, CO2 and costs

Pros Potential
savings
1. Advanced materials up to –30 %
Today’s reflectors and innovative surface
finishes provide for more efficient luminaires
(e.g. PSP+).
2. Use of daylight up to –60 %
The Luxmate daylight-based lighting control
system provides for high energy savings
where sufficient daylight is available.
3. Improvement of lamps and control gear up to –40 %
Innovations in the electronic control of lamps,
optimised temperatures and improvements
of the lamps’ physical properties provide for
extensive savings.
4. Taking ageing into account up to –17 %
The balance between the new value and
minimum illuminance can be saved by
dimmable control (Maintenance Control).
5. Taking room utilisation into account up to –25 %
Using presence detectors or a time-based
control system, the lighting can be adjusted
more properly to the time/s of use.
24 / Chapter 8
2. Improved ergonomic compatibility
Pros Potential
savings
1. Increased productivity
➝
According to various studies, people’s
productivity can be significantly improved by
an upgraded lighting solution (e.g. research
by TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955).
2. Fewer errors
➝
According to various studies, people’s error
rate can be minimised by an upgraded
lighting solution (e.g. research by
TU Ilmenau, AIF no. 9955).
3. Increased alertness
➝
The human physiology is decoded step by
step, allowing to perfectly adjust the lighting
to the individual (e.g. doctoral thesis by
Susanne Fleischer, ETH Zürich).
4. Enhanced sense of well-being
Pleasant brightness levels and personal
➝
control can have a positive impact on
people’s sense of well-being
(e.g. Light Right Consortium).
Please note: It is difficult to provide exact and generally appli-
cable figures; however, measurable increases were achieved in
individual cases. Minor increases already result in high economic
benefits.
Chapter 8 / 25
3. Improved maintenance conditions
(employment of staff for cleaning, maintenance and monitoring)
Potential
Pros savings
1. Extension of maintenance cycle up to +50 %
Over recent years, the service life of lamps
has been significantly extended (e.g. Philips
Master TL-D Xtreme, AURA Ultimate LL).
2. Reduction in maintenance costs up to –30 %
Contemporary luminaires frequently come in
a closed design, allowing for easy cleaning
(e.g. MELLOW LIGHT IV, LIGHTFIELDS,
PERLUCE).
3. Automatic monitoring of installations up to –80 %
Today, facility management tools allow for
automatic, central monitoring of installations
(e.g. in emergency lighting/ONLITE).
4. Energy savings up to –20 %
Easy cleaning of luminaires, and extension of
the maintenance cycle result in a reduced
number of luminaires required, and thus
energy savings (e.g. TECTON I IP).
4. Additional pros
Pros
1. Improvements in environmental factors
Today, WEEE and RoHS provide the basis for manufacturing
luminaires. Environmental impact has been reduced
(e.g. lead/cadmium).
2. State of the art
The latest lighting solutions reflect the state of the art and
an improved situation in terms of lighting standards.
Collecting data for lighting refurbishment

The following forms are intended to help you collect all relevant
data required for evaluating the situation in terms of existing
lighting installations. They provide the basis for comparing

technical lighting features and for calculating costs.
26 / Chapter 8
Data collection sheet for lighting refurbishment
Project Contact
Address Tel
Fax
Activities in room
Old system Option 1 Option 2

Luminaire type A
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire
including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Luminaire type B
Number of lamps per luminaire
Type of ballast
System power per luminaire
including ballast (W)
Illuminance
Total installed load in kW

ON period each day (h)
Working days per year
Annual ON period (h)
Power consumption in kWh/a
Annual savings in kWh
Basic power price kW/year
Power costs per kWh
Annual power costs in kWh

Annual savings
Chapter 8 / 27
Room length Reflection: wall %
Room width ceiling %
Room height floor %
Uniformity u = Emin =
Emean
Emean = lx
Emin = lx
Room sketch:
Costs Old system Option 1 Option 2

Cleaning per luminaire/year

Lamp replacement (incl. lamp)
28 / Chapter 8
1. Fundamental analysis in luminaires with electronic ballast or dimmable electronic ballast:
Error occurring Possible Possible Note Checked
cause solution ✓
Luminaire was recently Faulty circuit-breaker/mains fuse After checking, perhaps install new
installed but cannot be circuit-breaker/fuse
switched on
Faulty cable leading to luminaire Measure voltage at luminaire terminal 230 V ± 10 %
Fix wiring at input end
Ballast power down Use mains fuse to briefly switch off Power reset
luminaire power, then switch on
again
With 3~ through-wiring in particular, Visually check electronic ballasts if there
overvoltages (400 V) may have are any burn marks at mains input.
occurred. Replace all units affected.
Analysis of malfunctions in luminaires
– N conductor has been confused with

L conductor
– directly earthed conductor interrupted
– unbalanced load
Chapter 8 / 29
cause solution ✓
Luminaire worked but No re-ignition after lamp replacement Use mains fuse to briefly switch off Power reset
suddenly cannot be luminaire power, then switch on
30 / Chapter 8
switched on again again
Faulty lamp Check cause: replace lamp/s for working

lamp/s from adjacent luminaire. Fit new
lamp/s if cause has been confirmed.
In multi-lamp luminaires, all lamps
have to be replaced (make voltage
reset)
Wrong lamp Check compatibility with ballast.

Details on ballast label must
conform with details printed on
lamp
Faulty lampholder contact Check by rotating lamp several times

to left and right (approx. 180°)

2. Additional tests for luminaires with dimmable electronic ballast:
cause solution ✓
Dimmable luminaire Ballast power down in switchdim Use mains fuse to briefly switch off Power reset with
already worked but installations power. switchdim
suddenly cannot be Actuate momentary-action switch at
switched on again. switchdim input (switching on/off)
Ballast power down in LM and/or DALI Intermit signal in bus line (B1, B2 or Dali) Power reset with
bus installations (disconnect line). Use mains fuse to bus signal
briefly switch off power.
Then reconnect bus line and try to switch
luminaire via control gear installed
(LM or Dali).
Problems with signal line and/or bus Measure power at bus Specified values:
line (faulty bus) DALI: 9 to 15 V =

LM: 13 to 15 V =
DSI: no power
measured
Chapter 8 / 31
3. Additional test for HID luminaires (high-pressure lamps such as HIT, HST, etc.):
cause solution ✓
After relamping, No contact in lampholder thread – screw-fasten lamp as deeply as
32 / Chapter 8
luminaire does not possible
work any more. – between lamp solder point and cap tab
– remove oxidation from lamp solder
point, if necessary.

4. Analysis of partial function of luminaires with electronic ballast (bad lighting quality of fluorescent lamp):
cause solution ✓
Lamp start delayed No earth connection in luminaires with Connect luminaire earth
protection class 1
Bad dimming quality Bad earth connection Use high-resistance voltmeter to measure
power between phase and earth, and
between neutral conductor and earth
Poor luminous Ambient temperature of lamp Check for heat buildup underneath high Common
efficiency/dimming too low/too high ceilings or at workplaces with very high temperature range:
behaviour temperatures. Too low temperatures outside, –15 °C < T < 35 °C
or heavy air flow (e.g. air-conditioning system)
Cool spot neglected Do not operate lamps in positions Cool Spot

unprovided for
Increasing migration of dark spots In order to achieve an appropriate lighting

along fluorescent lamp quality, new lamps should always be operated
at 100% for the first 100 hours of operation
Chapter 8 / 33
Chapter 9
Services
Design process and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

ELI-LENI Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
VIVALDI – Composing light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Online product information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 – 8
Product data sheets and installation instructions
available online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CAD data in 2D and 3D available online . . . . . . . . . . 8
Online lighting design tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 – 10
ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Design process and tools
Design process:
Communication Attention to/awareness of concepts

and products
Requirement Determine basic situation; define

requirements
Design Blueprint planning

Work out a concept
Optimise
Detailed planning
Calculation
Documentation
Implementation Implementation
Testing
Maintenance
Design tools:
Communication Product catalogue, brochures, ads and

press work, trade fairs, congresses,
events, roadshows, Light Forums
Requirement ELI-LENI calculator

Research projects, studies
VIVALDI reference Library
Design Online catalogue, QuickCalc, FluxCalc,

system configurators, maintenance factor
calculation, LM Energy
Implementation VIVALDI visualisation, DIALux,

Relux, ELI-LENI calculator,
efficiency analysis,
VIVALDI optimising
Chapter 9 / 3
ELI-LENI calculator
Award your lighting solution a quality seal. The ELI-LENI
calculator calculates energy consumption in a straightforward
manner based on the provisions of EN 15193 (LENI). The five
descriptive quality criteria of any lighting solution (visual perform-
ance, vista, visual comfort, vitality and empowerment) are
evaluated within only a few minutes by means of a
questionnaire (ELI).
Further information and downloads at:

www.zumtobel.com/humanergybalance
4 / Chapter 9
VIVALDI – Composing light
The innovative software for Humanergy Balance lighting
concepts makes energy efficiency and lighting quality visible
and measurable.
– Optimised lighting solutions offering a balance between

energy and ergonomics
– Interactive visual preparation of scene-based lighting
concepts
– Dynamic visualisation of light including measurement of
energy consumption as well as CO2 quantity
– Supports the design process in combination with lighting
control technologies such as LUXMATE EMOTION
– Interactive visualisation of light colour and coloured light, light
quantity, direction of light (directional, diffuse) in room settings
– Project source data available from standard lighting design
software such as DIALux and Relux
Further information and downloads at:

www.zumtobel.com/vivaldi
Chapter 9 / 5
Online product information
Under the “Download” tab, the online catalogue provides a list of
all product specifications available for a certain product.
Quick access with URL/article reference:

www.zumtobel.com/60710147
Product information available:

– Photometric data sheets inc. UGR tables and maintenance
factors
– Data formats Eulumdat, IES
– CAD data: 2D and 3D
– Drag & drop data package for DIALux and Relux
– Brochures
– Installation instructions
– CE certificates
6 / Chapter 9
Product data sheets and installation
instructions available online
Any product information required can be selected from the
online catalogue and summarised in the form of a data sheet.
Additionally, all installation instructions for the respective product
are available in PDF format.
– Complete product information in PDF format, up to date and

country-specific: figures, charts, images
– Compilation of the product information selected in the form of
a data sheet (ZIP file)
– Photometric data sheets
– Data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE products
– Quick dispatch of any part of the catalogue by e-mail
Chapter 9 / 7
CAD data in 2D and 3D available online
The 2D and 3D data for ZUMTOBEL products can be down-
loaded free of charge in various formats, e.g. dxf, Rhino,
Lightscape, 3D Studio Max etc.
– Quick selection of the required symbol

– 2D luminaire symbols for AutoCAD as library and in DXF
format
– 3D luminaires for various CAD systems
– Special data sheets with connecting instructions for LUXMATE
products
– Available formats: DXF, Rhino, Lightscape, 3D Studio Max
Just take a look at:

www.zumtobel.com/download
8 / Chapter 9
Online lighting design tools
QuickCalc online:
QuickCalc provides for a quick, approximate determination of
the number of luminaires required to achieve a defined illumi-
nance level according to the light output ratio method – or vice
versa: to determine the illuminance level of a defined number of
luminaires.
In the ZUMTOBEL online catalogue, QuickCalc is available under

the “QuickCalc” tab for products with calculation data.
Chapter 9 / 9
FluxCalc online (calculation of luminous flux):
Using FluxCalc, the luminous flux of T16 and T26 lamps in rela-
tion to ambient temperature can be determined. For T16 lamps,
FluxCalc also includes the influence of ZUMTOBEL’s “Cool Spot
Optimizer” in the calculation.
ZUMTOBEL Lighting DVD

ZUMTOBEL data plug-in for DIALux and Relux with all available
product data (Product Explorer – with QuickCalc and maintenance
factor calculation), updated versions of DIALux and Relux as well
as further tools: LUXMATE Energy Light, ZX2 configurator,
ELI/LENI calculator and VIVALDI demo version.
10 / Chapter 9
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
Personal Notes
Chapter 10
United Kingdom Hong Kong
Zumtobel Lighting Ltd. Zumtobel Lighting Hong Kong
Unit 4 - The Argent Centre, Unit 319, Level 43,
Pump Lane Tower 1, Metroplaza,
London 223 Hing Fong Road,
Hayes/Middlesex UB3 3BL Kwai Chung, N.T.
T +44/(0)20 8589 1800 T +852/(0)2503 0466
F +44/(0)20 8756 4800 F +852/(0)2503 0177
M enquiriesuk@zumtobel.com M admin@zumtobel.com.hk
www.zumtobel.co.uk
United Arab Emirates
USA and Canada Zumtobel Lighting GmbH
Zumtobel Lighting Inc. Dubai Airport Free Zone,
Location Highland 3rd East Wing, 4th Floor,
3300 Route 9W Office 413
Highland, New York 1258-2630 PO Box 54620
T +1/(0)845/691 62 62 Dubai
F +1/(0)845/691 62 89 T +971/(4) 214 9845
www.zumtobel.us F +971/(4) 214 9501
www.zumtobel.ca
Norway
Australia and New Zealand Zumtobel Belysning
Zumtobel Lighting Pty Ltd Pilestredet 75 C
333 Pacific Highway 0354 Oslo
North Sydney, NSW 2060 Postbox 5829 Majorstuen
T +61/(2)8913 5000 0308 Oslo
F +61/(2)8913 5001 T +47/22 46 85 00
M info@zumtobel.com.au F +47/22 46 85 02
www.zumtobel.com.au M info.se@zumtobel.com
China Sweden
Zumtobel Lighting China Zumtobel Belysning
Beijing Office Birger Jarlsgatan 57
T5-2-152 Tayuan 113 56 Stockholm
Diplomatic Compound T +46/(0)8/26 26 50
No. 1 Xin Dong Road, F +46/(0)8/26 56 05
Chaoyang District M info.se@zumtobel.com
100600 Beijing www.zumtobel.se
T +86/(10) 8532 3886
F +86/(10) 8532 3889
M admin@zumtobel.com.hk
Denmark Slovenia and Croatia
Light Makers AS Zumtobel Licht d.o.o.
Indiavej 1 Dunajska cesta 159
2100 Copenhagen 1000 Ljubljana
T +45/(0)35 43 70 00 T +386/(1) 56 09 820
F +45/(0)35 43 54 54 F +386/(1) 56 09 866
M ralf.ritter@lightmakers.dk M bzslowenien@zumtobel.si
www.lightmakers.dk www.zumtobel.si
Czech Republic and Headquarters

Slovak Republic Zumtobel Lighting GmbH
Zumtobel Lighting s.r.o. Schweizer Strasse 30
Vlastislavova 11 Postfach 72
Praha 4 6851 Dornbirn, AUSTRIA
140 00 Praha T +43/(0)5572/390-0
T +420/(2) 41 740 301 F +43/(0)5572/22 826
F +420/(2) 41 740 308
M praha@zumtobel.com Zumtobel Licht GmbH
www.zumtobel.cz Grevenmarschstrasse 74-78
32657 Lemgo, GERMANY
Poland T +49/(0)5261/2 12-0
Zumtobel Lighting GmbH Sp.z.o.o. F +49/(0)5261/2 12-7777
Przedstawicielstwo w Polsce www.zumtobel.de
ul. Narbutta 46/48
02-541 Warszawa www.zumtobel.com
T +48/(22) 856 7431
F +48/(22) 856 7432
www.zumtobel.pl
Russia
Zumtobel Lighting GmbH
Official Representative Office
Skakovaya Str. 17
Bld. No 1, Office 1104
125040 Moscow
T +7/(495) 945 36 33
F +7/(495) 945 16 94
www.zumtobel.ru
Art.-No. 04 797 525-UK 12/08 © Zumtobel Lighting GmbH
Technical data was correct at time of going to press.
We reserve the right to make technical changes without notice.
Please contact your local sales office for further information.
Printed on environmentally-friendly chlorine-free paper.

9 The Lighting Handbook - Zumtobel !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

9 The Lighting Handbook - Zumtobel !!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

The Lighting

The Lighting Handbook

2nd edition, revised and updated, December 2008

What is light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–3

Basic parameters used in lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5

What is light? What does the human eye see?

Wavelength [m] Relative spectral

By day we see in colour, while at night we can only see in

– Light for visual functions

– Light creating biological effects

– Light for emotional perception

Candela [lm/sr]=[cd] Lux [lm/m2]=[lx]

solid angle into which luminous ﬂux is emitted

Illuminance – definition of terminology

intervals for the lamps and installation) must be documented.

Glare – glare limitation

– luminaires without glare – reflective surfaces

control – incorrect luminaire arrangement

– loss of concentration – loss of concentration

– more frequent mistakes – more frequent mistakes

– luminaires with limited – matching luminaire to

luminance levels workstation (layout)

Colour temperature Appearance Association

The light colour sets the underlying mood of the room!

Colour rendition index Ra ≥ 90 80–89 70–79 60–69 40–59 20–39

Application examples (minimum requirements for Ra):

Display format on fluorescent lamps

Colour temperature 4,000 K (nw)

Measuring instruments: description and precision

Measuring grid and measuring level

Size of measuring field Grid element spacing

The UGR method takes account of all the luminaires in the

UGR limits (UGRL), that must not be exceeded:

≤ 22 Craft and light industries

2000 1000 500 <300

for nominal illuminance (lx)

The previously used luminance limiting curve method defined

sets UGR = 19 as the maximum permissible value for offices,

TASK AREA lighting concepts are a customised tool to fully

Emotional and biological effects

Optimum energy efficiency

Lighting focussed onto individual visual task

and attractive; dynamic lighting situations can

The Humanergy Balance concept harmonises both aspects of

Example of ELI assessment using a spider chart.

– Balanced brightness distribution

– Artificial light complemented by daylight

– Individual influence by switching and dimming

Use of the charts is described in Chapter 8 / 3–10 “Checklists”.

Formula for calculating a lighting installation’s energy

The following factors have a positive impact on the

Standard values for lighting of indoor and

Illuminance levels must not fall below the E m maintenance

Traffic zones and general areas inside buildings

simple parts, glazing, glass blowing 300 25 80

• Grinding of optical glass, crystal, hand

• Manufacture of delicatessen foods, kitchen

• Inspection of glasses and bottles, product

tolerances ≥ 0.1 mm 300 22 60

• Wire and pipe drawing shops; cold forming 300 25 60

• Control platforms; control panels 300 22 80

Textile manufacture and processing